Home

2010 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s guide

1. 469 Door LOCKS 45450625663 40snhah Rob RES ahora 30 Do oxi gee he oe oa Se ek Sanh aes 4 a 26 Driver s Seat Back Ult oua galee goce entm s 122 DUI sas uisa eee asa aoe ae ne segs RE nae 291 Off Pavement 2 6 4 bree uh dee a oe Ue d 6 dri Ad 352 ORO seprene eee EENG 352 DUL TOP TT 150 Electrical Outlet Auxiliary Power Outlet 146 Electrical Power Outlete xv uus trm n mem os 146 Electronic Brake Control System 371 Anti Lock Brake System lus 971 Brake Assist SySteni aus ao x ER 40404 372 Electronic Roll Mitigation 376 Electronic Stability Program a 3 R ER YU Traction Control System ue soe eee dont 371 Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 376 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 142 Electronic Stability Program ESP 377 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light 262 Emergency Brake 280 qax a9 eR 3350 QUEE 3 366 Emergency In Case of Io Pr ETT 438 Jump SUTUN aoa eo deed n 9 33 8 Ro iei a 443 TOW HOOKS nnm 447 Emission Control System Maintenance 453 500 Engine Par ClCaner 4 4 62 bee a d aos Rer SOR Ooch ey S 459 Plock Healer spess dion dedos cq a a de e ii 902 Break In Recommendations 75 COPACI PPP emus 451 Compartment Identification 451 Exhaust Gas Caution 004 76 411 cci aree cru NEM Gene he ees 331 Hooded OUIRE 456642 d eb de bred REUS ikk ikA 331 534 INDEX M
2. es 476 Power OlCCIING ou esce daos 2 1 9 03 4 9 ERR ORE 365 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 497 a EEELLLILISIIIIIIGIIILUULIILLISIILIIILILILILLLLILILTIAG UG GAG AS7e SGUCGGGGGOLILAbALLLALLLLLLILAEPD PSI UALILAULLLNLUAUL Lsu 1 1 LL LLLO 1 A 1L LNLLILO GGAASSLLLI 2 2 OI C77 Los DSL Service 42426 9 ST PRETI RA ERR 494 Poe br C eG 135 494 Fold and Tumble Rear Seat 24 RE se cave 126 Folding Kear Seal cress ie Roe doner chee eames amp 129 Folding Windshield esis erasora rari tre ake 234 Four Witeel Dive xu ego x ak e qom Reg 343 li PC 345 Four Wheel Drive Operation 343 Four Wway Hazard Flasher 2 vasos eese trenes 436 Front Axle Differential 477 CC 407 Filer Cap Gas Cap 2250444245444 pipisi 412 erc ans fice P T 407 Sr RET 248 Materials Added aad goes deed tue ah 3E Rp ios 410 acudir MES 407 ICQUINCINCINS eua 456445 ek d eC Ede PEOR 496 Ton CIPI 44 ascppuaces PE SG eae pet ee oA 496 Puel System CAUNO ui uebars Gee dot nre 410 413 Jj weoteuieade ones one SSE se eee oe 485 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 412 414 452 Gasoline Fuel leen 407 Gasoline Reformulated 408 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 408 Gauges Coolant Temperature 16s ed 06 484 ede4 ees 253 PUG CC 248 Sou AC am 256 DOCCGOMEICE rp 248 TWaGHOMICIERD x 54248224 9IS er XE 252 Sear RINGES n teen epee ee S 33
3. 86 Placard Tire and Loading Information 391 Polishing and Waxing as senos soacises Benepe de es 479 INDEX M Power Door Locks 4 2 3 6 HSS ES REED ROS AU 31 GIGGPIIO 44 64 4 Hearn ea ERES ISO Bee dU IR 365 WiIndOWS CQPRCTTTTTTTUTTTTT T TIT TITT 34 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 48 Preparation for Jacking i voee reme 439 Pretensioners Seat Belts amp 2sesx 3 oRPS ORE EDR eS 47 Radial DIS es uuu cerae iens e d E CEEUR cas oe oe 398 Radio ODDO HOM wae tee toa 2p I in dps 199 E Boney 315 Radio Satellite Uconnect studios 309 Rear Axle Differential sss 477 Rear owing Gale ECC w 36 Rear Window Defroster less 242 Rear Window Features esee 241 Rear Wiper YVashef a ex cue ea e E RES 241 Rearview Mirrors leen 84 Recreational TOWING essit xr arbor i 430 D EEEEELLLLSIIIIIIIGIIIIIILIULLULILILILISUUILIIIIICL AGA AAAG UALG IOCS O LLAU UO LLOLUUA LUut sd B Bbiildn 4 Oe ADSCH O O J ILLA ALULLOGLOGSUAI3G AOCUGGdJDOBOULULLLLKLL LeLIL L G 0GO GGue L 2 O07 2 Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral N 431 Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral N 432 Reformulated Gasoline auos nos Seir dob ms 408 lae a ecco serene kot eae ogee oe ees 461 Release Hood 26523 vos 6 4cadancedeeeeda 131 Reminder Lights OW sirisser o1 6n irr gs 199 Reminder Seat Belt llle 47 Remote Control DOG LOC
4. Next to play the next memo e Voice Training 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vr button first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command amp vr button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle They need to be used properly for safe operation of the vehicle WARNING e DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Front Seat Adjustment Move the seat forward or rea
5. hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or equiva achras sice NODI p A oba a WIE i scratch metal and painted surfaces lent or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels i completely with clear water e Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of e If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu paint and decals lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove Special Care e Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film stains near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once and to protect your paint finish Take care never to a month scratch the paint 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and tailgate are kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc assure that such materials are well packaged
6. Announcement Toggle Confirmation Prompts onvatf Device Towing Basan Pairing Assistance will English Espanol temporarily or Francais Say 4 didit System Lists override pin code Phones phone li priorities Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Alternate s n st ero ne O X ven confirmation prompts continue delete dial download edit home BEEN UO 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Voice Commands list phones Alternate s pairing phone book Voice Commands Primar redial return to main menu select phone send set up towing assistance transfer call Uconnect Tutorial try again voice training work yes Alternate s phone settings or phone set up ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interferenc
7. LL Second Row ALR AIR ThirdRow If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupants mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupants mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seating positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in the rear outboard seating position Children 12 years old and younger should always be properly restrained in the rear seat How To Use The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound
8. 0 527 UPOLE Cale P r 481 Vat MIOS 43 aure R3 f pirni ki kronis 86 Vehicle Certification Label 414 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 8 voide LOadIne 40x4 ases X RE OR arx Res 391 414 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 8 Vee SONE MEM EPUM 323 491 Viscosity PNGING Ol s sa ue tay eae gaa os a os 458 Voice Recognition System VR 115 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 248 Warnings and Cautions 4 2 s s desc ea BOE 949 ed 8 Warranty Information s dci o eoe e 4 4 524 Washers Windshield sn 462 Wimme and PONSE erise stampia 5 00 deir d 479 Wheel and Wheel Trim 480 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 480 Wheel MOUNE 3 22 2 993 42642245504 en 85 442 Wand DUNSTAN 22648 6 one Vg oe eia eee he Biens 36 CRIME LLLLLLIIIIIIIILIIIIIULLULIUILIIIULLS LI LHLL TDILOELIG LALEI IILLUIULILL LLOSIILLbnicuHALOL A e AUIALIG ciiuiWLUUULAUSAU4u SUGGLILLAGMULGQLLALL L L H Gel Widow Fogging A geb enGken aoe e gs PRESS 322 MEDECIN lt 5 226 245536 665454 ene EES EUER ES 34 lo cux TT 34 Windshield Defroster 00000 77 Wipdsmeld POIDS ises eres he up apu eee ae 234 Windshield Washers 138 462 Ji 462 Windshield Wiper Blades Le 462 Windshield WiIp rs 2a ean eee qa kot awe es 138 Wiper APR HR 24 SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALIST
9. 095 O Hill Start Assist HSA 00 373 O Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 397 oO Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM 376 O Radial Ply Tires O Electronic Stability Program ESP 377 PTC SPINNING ci eganegereudee one op des O ESP BAS Warning Light 383 D Tread Wear Indicators 398 E Trailer Sway Control TSC Las o ce mn 384 EEbIIO Hio C nase nee ee ere ee eee os 399 W Tire Safety Information 385 O Replacement Tires 400 D EM BS geweodeeesRaghes eee a EE 385 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 401 O Tire Identification Number TIN 388 W Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS 402 328 STARTING AND OPERATING M A Dase Syste 22 9219 4 29 pred X een genes E S 404 O General Information 15 92 cir RERR CR 407 Bl Fuel Requirements 04 407 oO Reformulated Gasoline 408 B Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 408 O E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 409 EPNINET A Gasoline aun oci d ries trenirati 409 O Materials Added TO Fuel 229 RR 9w 410 O puel System COultOflS aue ctw ad esacs n te 410 H Carbon Monoxide Warnings 411 W Adding Fuel 4522 RR 412 El Fuel Filler Cap Gace Cap vssesers deus 412 O Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 414 W Vehicle Loading 29k i RR ARTS 414 oO Certification Label 2220 23 96 414 W Trailer Towing e eese 416 H3 Common
10. 528 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee Temperature Grades WARNING The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the ing either separately or in combination can cause material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and heat buildup and possible tire failure excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law INDEX 530 INDEX M ABS Anti Lock Brake System 251 369 oris rn 412 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 459 Air Conditioner Maintenance 460 Aw CONGINONING xod wea cad awa XR vd 218 521 Air Conditioning Controls uses xum emisse 32l Air Conditioning Operating Tips D Air Conditioning Refrigerant 461 Air Conditioning SVSICIN oearcpSuweeyevet9eses 321 A EIE s a ee E E ee 459 Air Pressure T
11. leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a e Do not idle the engine for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating condi tions e Do not allow the vehicle to run out of fuel 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M garden hose vertically down the face of the A C con denser if equipped or the back of the radiator core Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks With the engine at normal operating temperature but not running check the cooling system pressure cap for proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of engine coolant antifreeze from the radiator drain cock If the cap is sealing properly the engine coolant anti freeze will begin to drain from the coolant recovery bottle DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT Cooling System Drain Flush and Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty and contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information Selection Of Engine Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to F
12. tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee 24 Odometer Trip Odometer Display Area The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven The trip odometer shows individual trip mileage Refer to Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button for additional information U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display ECO 22544 sh e4 ESTAS Fuel Saver I
13. window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD and MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD play
14. 203010 1 Wrangler o m O c isj e e s e e e e Ls Le INTRODUCTION sa 3193 EUROPEO IECUR cee xo es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STARTING AND OPERATING 26 TABLE OF CONTENTS CONTENTS M Introduction M Rollover Warning E How To Use This Manual INTRODUCTION 4 W Warnings And Cautions 5 i Vehicle Identification Number 6 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 4 INTRODUCTION M INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This is a specialized utility vehicle designed for both on road and off road use It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional two wheel drive enclosed vehicles were not intended It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger cars both on road and off road so take time to become familiar with your vehicle The two wheel drive utility vehicle was designed for on road use only It is not intended for off road driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a four wheel drive vehicle Before you start to drive this vehicle read the Owner s Manual Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls
15. 4 Touch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 5 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 6 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed MEDIA CENTER 130 RES AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate Red ed ad Rd Sd all cem Le DISC 042305232 RES Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 290 UNDE
16. Driving faster than 18 mph 29 km h may cause loss of control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury Contact your local authorized dealer for assistance ON ROAD DRIVING TIPS Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a narrower track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off road applications Specific design characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than ordinary cars 352 STARTING AND OPERATING ee An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road allowing you to anticipate problems They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional two wheel drive vehicles any more than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfacto rily in off road conditions If at all possible avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover OFF ROAD DRIVING TIPS Side Step Removal If Equipped NOTE Prior to off road usage the side steps should be removed to prevent damage 1 Remove the two nuts from the bodyside 3 Remove the side step assembly The Basics of Off Road Driving You will encounter many types of terrain driving off road You should be familiar with the terrain and area before proceeding There are many types of surface conditions hard packed dirt gravel rocks grass sand mud snow and i
17. The two door model does not have a center seating position Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only in both the two door and four door models Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a common lower anchorage ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only install the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt for typical instal lation instructions Installing the LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here Again carefully follow the installation instructions that were provided with the child restraint system The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars e located at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and are visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel them if you run your fin
18. comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system or both If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE e The ESP BAS Warning Light comes on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON e Each time the ignition is turned ON the ESP System will be ON even if it was previously turned off e The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESP activation 384 STARTING AND OPERATING M Trailer Sway Control TSC TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway The system may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the appro priate wheel s to counteract the sway of the trailer TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized No driver action is re quired Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer Towing in Starting and Operating for further information When TSC is
19. e Radio to switch to the radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e Memo to switch to the memo recorder e System Setup to switch to system setup Radio AM or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium Wave If Equipped To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Next Station to select the next station e Previous Station to select the previous station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu e Main Menu to switch to the main menu 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Radio FM e Previous Channel to select the previous channel Es E E ea s praedo Pide e ist Channel to hear a list of available channels this mode you may say the following commands e Frequency to change the frequency e Select Name to say the name of a channel Radio M t itch to th di e Next Station to select the next station e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu 5 44 p h h e Previous Station to select the previous station e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Radio Menu t itch to the radi adio Menu to switch to the radio menu To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you e Main Menu to switch to the main menu may say the following commands Satellite Radio To switch to
20. vers Crossing Obstacles Rocks and Other High Points While driving off road you will encounter many types of terrain These varying types of terrain bring different types of obstacles Before proceeding review the path ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel bring the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle forward until it makes contact with the object Apply the throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up and over the object WARNING Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system loading which could cause you to loose control of your vehicle Using a Spotter There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle or determine the correct path Determining the correct path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting many obstacles In these cases have someone guide you over through or around the obstacle Have the person stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see the obstacle watch your tires and undercarriage and guide you through ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 Crossing Large Rocks When approaching large rocks choose a path which ensures you drive over the largest of them with your tires This will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle The tread of the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is design
21. 2 ere ee 1 Install the rear door frame first Bs n 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body bis ee nae 2 2 2 Side just behind the rear door opening 5 81924c19 eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 SEDES long knob to hold the 4 Loosely install the rear knob sport bar and press onto the side bar making sure not to door rail in position pinch the material of the sports bar covers and to ensure it is properly positioned on the seal above the front of the rear door 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 5 Carefully set the front of the front door frame in the rubber seal at the top of the windshield Then clip the front of the door rail over the side bar making sure that the material for the side bar cover is not pinched by the door frame Position the rear of the front door frame to lay on top of the front of the rear door frame 6 Loosely install both knobs beginning with the front knob long knob Then install the middle knob short knob through the front and rear door frames and screw into the top of the B pillar 7 Tighten the front knob then the rear most knob and then the middle knob Repeat this procedure for the other side ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top Please visit the owners section of Jeep com for inst
22. 51 B Climate Controls 0 004 515 O Satellite Antenna 0005 311 a RE zin O Reception Quality 0 311 O Manual Heating And Air Conditioning O Operating Instructions Uconnect TN Multimedia Satellite Mode 311 M RE Sel O Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone Operating DS ss 999 hos oe P 3 ne yas RS 322 F Equipped seras a Ski odes ded x de dias 314 D Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES it BOuIppeO sia ata aia 314 System If Bauipped u s cue aca a Rs 318 4 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SS INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 040109115 1 Air Outlet 6 Climate Controls 2 Instrument Cluster 7 Power Outlet 3 Horn 8 Lower Switch Bank 4 Radio 9 Auxiliary Power Outlet Cigar Lighter 5 Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER t8 81918b50 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Fuel Gauge The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to OFF the fuel gauge voltmeter oil pressure and temperature gauges may not show accurate readings When the engine is not running turn the ignition switch to ON to obtain accurate readings 2 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should c
23. Press the clutch and pause briefly to allow the gear train to stop rotating Beginning from the NEUTRAL position move the shift lever in one quick smooth motion straight across and into the REVERSE area the driver will feel a firm click as the shifter passes the knock over Complete the shift by pulling the shift lever into REVERSE tion Maxi mum Speed The knock over prevents the driver from accidentally entering the REVERSE shift area and warns the driver that they are about to shift the transmission into RE VERSE Due to this feature a slow shift to REVERSE can be perceived as a high shift effort AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 337 CAUTION Continued e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal WARNING It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You
24. Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt WARNING across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the Using a seat belt extender when not needed can abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips willtake increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use the force if there is a collision when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn Seat Belt Extender low and snug and in the recommended seating If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and pohona ISERIOVE an OUE ION Ee eai DONC extenert when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if Men MeL TERLAN equipped is in its lowest position your authorized dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS Airbags This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and right front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the steering wheel The front passenger airbag is mounted in the i
25. The ESC Malfunction Indica tor Light also flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent acci dents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 27 OID Overdrive Off Indicator Light O D This light will illuminate when the O D OFF button has been selected and overdrive has been turned off The O D OFF button is located on the center console 28 Sway Bar Indicator Light If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front SWAY swav bar is disconnected BAR y 29 Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake Assist System BAS Warning Light The Electronic Stability Program ESP Brake ESP Assist System BAS warning light in the in BAS MEUS
26. Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Command system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before speaking Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Storing names
27. assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn web bing etc 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout Four Door Models Only This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the 60 rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched NOTE e f the rear center lap shoulder belt cannot be pulled out check that the rear seatback is fully latched e f the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out the Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be activated To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retractor WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lock out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be taken to your autho
28. automatically shift from DRIVE to OVERDRIVE if the following conditions are present e The shift lever is in DRIVE e The O D OFF switch has not been activated e Vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph 48 km h When frequent transmission shifting occurs while using Overdrive such as when operating the vehicle under heavy load conditions for example in hilly terrain strong head winds or trailer towing turning off over drive will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission overheats a HOTOIL message may be displayed in the odometer accompanied by a chime sound STARTING AND OPERATING 341 M zm Overdrive Off Switch Overdrive can be locked out by pressing the O D OFF switch located on the center console The O D OFF Indicator Light on the switch will illuminate to show that the switch has been activated When the indicator light is on Overdrive is locked out Pressing the switch a 342 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee second time restores the Overdrive function The lockout CAUTION feature is useful when towing a trailer or carrying a heavy load e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you bd 8 M FC ecomd must turn the ignition from LOCK so the steering This range is used for moderate grades and to assist wheel and shift lever P released Otherwise braking on dry pavement or in mud and snow The damage to the steerin
29. ded sas tra etie Peg dod 3157 Center High Mounted Stop Lamp 1 L E D IOS GDS 2x ek d a eO RR Pere ee EG PSX24W Front Park Turn Signal Lamps 2 3157 Front Side Marker Lamps 2 ai aac scii eie e 168 Headlamps 2 26644 a uen qued y e d hood E i ges His Rear Stop Tail Turn Lamps 2 9157 License oll Duce ek Bee eee ke p des dr ee esas 194 NOTE Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from your local authorized dealer If a bulb needs to be replaced visit your authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process Headlamp 1 Open hood and support using prop rod 2 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 3 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side and working toward the other 4 Turn both park and turn signal socket assemblies 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove 5 Remove the four screws holding the metal retaining ring 6 Remove the lamp from the collar 7 Grasp the bulb and turn 1 4 turn counterclockwise 8 Pull the bulb from the housing 9 Push connector locking tab to the unlock pos
30. ee Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUM
31. ing The Features Of Your Vehicle No function a For Uconnect Voice Command refer to Uconnect m Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle TIME Button Auxiliary Mode 4 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Press the TIME button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF Auxiliary Mode l Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia No function Satellite Radio If Equipped SET Button Auxiliary Mode Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio No function 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide Dolby Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technol ogy that is protected by U S patents and other intellec tual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited DTS DTS and DTS 2 0 are trade
32. or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired e When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your cellular phone s phonebook Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Cellular Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the cellular phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from downloaded or Uconnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle e A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be dow
33. rather than in the front There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNINCG In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size Infants and Child Restraints e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 Ibs 9 kg Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats e The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg but are less than one year old Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle
34. 2 CETERO TIR E CT TRO T T TT ITO 249 v MNAMRRRRMMCR 120 AAOS s aas vr s Puto autre st hae en 120 Basy ENUY 45264650 e dundee nee teen enone 129 Fold and Tumble Rear 126 Head Restraints leen 124 FICO AQUSINCNL acu deg duty 2 ie Sd e Era d 122 Rear Pole sepa pum i scant o dolre ord diis 129 REMOVAL rendered bo oa oe a ee ee 128 129 Seatback Release a 122 THUS A 122 Security Against Theft 2uacss sede ud beg ved 17 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 17 Selection of Oil 24 zzseseccccra4m 24 Oe E 457 Sentry Key Immobilizer ese Re 14 Sentry Key Programming 4 sack 95 3 95 9 erg 16 Sentry Key Replacement 2229649409 45 99e 15 Service Assistance eee 521 Service Contract 4 244444 bc RR GGG 49604 523 Service Mantals co ee wo tes bue resi ne xoa 525 Setting the Clock 270 285 286 290 299 Shift Lock Manual Override 338 sli PCrC 336 Automatic Transmission 339 Manual Transmission es 333 Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage 44 Shoulder Belts 4 14 2 saecm c Saas oa a 39 DIGS Od P eee OES Ne oe 57 Pigtials WIM 6444945448 pine 78 134 249 494 495 DOW IO Pr eee needa eee ees ee 177 201 DDAIG TG wa uuu teg P3 ERE y i r S 439 Specifications Fuel Gasoline icio Ea Rus does See era 90d s 407 CW 6548 6eu2 eho ee ee RESI ESSE 457 s
35. 73 Two Door X Model 6 049 Ibs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 Ibs 91 Kg 4WD 2 744 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 Two Door X Model 6 051 Ibs 25 sq n 2 000 Ibs 200 lbs 91 kg 4WD 2 745 kg 2 32sq m 907 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 Two Door Sahara 5 291 25 sq 3 1 000 E 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 4WD 2 373 kg 2 32 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 Two Door Sahara 6 291 E 25 sq 3 2 000 E 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 826 ke 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 72 Two Door Sahara 6 233 E 25 sq ER 2 000 E 200 Ibs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 827 kg 2 32sq m 907 kg 3 8L Manual 4 10 2 Door Rubicon 6 365 25 sq 3 2 000 200 lbs 91 Kg Model 4WD 2 887 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg STARTING AND OPERATING 421 Engine Axle Model GCWR Gross Frontal Max GTW Max Trailer Transmission Combined Wt Area Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 8L a Automatic 4 10 Two Door Rubicon 6 366 lbs 25 sq ft 2 000 Ibs 200 lbs 91 kg Model 4WD 2 887 kg 2 32 sq m 907 kg 3 8L bana Automatic 3 73 Four Door X Model 7 734 lbs 32 sq m 3 500 E 350 Ibs 159 kg WD 3 508 Kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 Four Door Sahara 7 999 E 32 sq 3 500 E 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 2WD 3 580 Kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 Four Door X Model 5 431 S 32 sq 1 000 i 100 Ibs 45 kg 4WD 2 463 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 Four Door X Model 7 931 lbs 32 sq m 3 500 E
36. Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time and frequency display Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save the time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and selecting the SET HOME CLOCK entry Once in this display follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the
37. CD CITITITPTTT 263 Compass Calibration 4 xr dose eR 5 265 Computer TED ravel sace a x39 d Bp o gb ot 262 Console es 149 Console Floor sso 456 vm muore trees 149 Contract Service sss e y oe ord o doe es 523 COODBE S USDEIDE aue eere ata seeks one DES ea 465 Adding Coolant Antifreeze i n 467 Coolant C 3DUCID oou ace ce aucuce vs ee oe pax 496 Coolant Level 2244044389604 Ernte a Ro S d 469 Disposal of Used Coolant 469 Drain Flush and Refill 466 INSPCCHOR 1x33 496239 6642 thus ean PECES 465 Points to Remember 0004 470 Pressure Cap uote eee Es ERREA 468 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 466 496 Corrosion Protection 2244464 ERE RE EE RR 478 Gucci PEE P TT 253 Suppl PP ei 148 Customer Assistance lees 521 Daytime Running Lights s soer odis issa s sm 136 Dealer Service 0 0 ee ees 454 Defroster Rear Window 242 Defroster Windshield 77 916 317 319 Delay Intermittent Wipers gt se seere duy eo 139 Diagnostic System Onboard amp veas eme 452 Dimmer Switch Headlight 2e ms 135 Dipsticks SEDIT aeaaea aa a E a eae gears 456 POWEr lCCUO serari 9 Wea CRUS RR S UP SE Y 365 Disabled Vehicle Towing 0 04 447 Disarmine Theft System usscosr4ex tier L4 RE RS 18 Se INDEX 533 Disposal P OE Oll aspeoeeped gee te nas Gans ee oor 458 Used Coolant Antifreeze
38. Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine and will not shift during travel When trailering axle or other parts could be damaged cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a can occur that may be difficult for the driver to an ee is towed do not drive over 50 mph control You could lose control of your vehicle and 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle have an accident This helps the engine and other parts of the When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not valiicle wearin at the heamer loads overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to the brakes axle engine transmission steer ing suspension chassis structure or tires Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners Continued Improper towing can lead to an injury accident Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 425 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
39. E D U L E S 8 514 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 120 000 Miles 200 000 km or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace accessory drive belt s Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the CV joints Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 5046 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter s O C O O O L G C C L L M A l N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 515 126 000 Miles 210 000 km or 126 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for poli
40. Fuel Reguirements 4 c444 444424n0ea54 407 496 Jump otar 2244666 see Ere E Hees ee a 5 443 o bees ea gs de Coos Chee eee nes 6 es 456 496 Oil IS POSdl capone oe uiti gas eae yee tegy 458 OU TINGE Sage xe ay 6 Peu ae xd eae 458 il SEICCON eepe hy oRene eae ean nae oe gs 4 496 OVeIneddi cas pu dass ep oe angers ee was 436 vir isum 929 Temperature Galge sig vencdeas Jee udew s 253 EMG geil VISGOSID ice dues art d 3 dra org n kee 458 Engine Viscosity Chart 444 ein erra tiens 458 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 59 Entry System Illuminated 0 4 19 Exhaust Gas Caution 000 76 411 PNAS OD SIS spect unegen ae e ips coe aes 76 463 Extender Seat Belt 5 s4 e2 08 et4442 0505 49 Extenor Nish Cale 2 ss dps s bento nn an ees 479 PN Wigs 2 ecgceneade ooeu ee tees tenes 78 Fabric Cae 221212 42259 39954452 933 481 482 PDH TOP 2i been ae oes pee eee Gabo 482 Filters Air Cleaner xu un ocmoo eR RE REDE X SU ee 459 Engine Cl iss udtuciu a Eq soaps ota abs 458 Fish Cafe 4eaeoeqeu6 te eee tes uedunewe was 479 Flashers Hazard Warning s oes ne citeer i HE oH ees 436 TU SIONAL ou eee ee Peas ERES 78 249 494 495 Flooded Engine Sarun uus oe Soit dee ri 29 diio Capacities PIER D 496 Pitta Leaks NENESTTSSEITTSTSTRTTRCIUORTITTTTE 78 Fluid Level Checks less 477 Automatic Transmission 473 BOCINC OU us oed Sepia 2 ROCROP ROSE ena eir d 456 Manual Transmission
41. Iistraiment CI slel sacs sis kada bdo door hee 247 Instrument Panel and Controls 246 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 482 Integrated Power Module Fuses 485 Interior Appearance Care a 44 ssn ae veces es s 481 IntenoE LENIS Gants eee nese see tE rok RR 136 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 139 IAMOCUCHON 45444 peni eG 280 93 063 Fone d dns 4 A INDEX 537 Jack LOCA 2309239 9r ESSO ee Pa ps 438 Ja KOPION erreren 9 b db te ded ew 438 440 441 Jacking Ins Uc vascos qe SE d ees 440 Jump OPENS urere dresse R8 os n see Ca bon E ene 443 Key ErOBTADIDIB ax eee neemt Hawa dog 16 Key Replacement 3234222235243 qare anes 15 Key Sentry Immobilizer x s sace an eR 644454 14 Ie cn ROMTE secas s uue o d vd ap Ew a vg rs 13 Keyless Entry System ss 6040 grece der d ec nae au ms 19 B IIT 12 Lane Change and Turn Signals 249 Lane Change ASSIST gay dhe yl oe E rd 90 eae 3 134 LAP g 39 Lap Shoulder Belts 4 22294 6x RR Rer es 39 LATCH Lower Anchors and Tether for CMON 666oo5 04655 eee cnet FS 67 69 lunc 444 eeGieemetee de ERRET HT 78 Lead Free Gasoline Less 407 Leaks Fluid 2 4 as eae Borges as oe PRESS d ees 78 Light Bulbs course d ne cence acese Geeta ners ss 78 Bra P 78 132 i EREET EEPE TETTEIT EEEE 60 77 252 AI RETE ITETITISZTCTRTLITOROTTT 252 AMLOK 24446526 eee 6S ears RUSSE Os 251 Anti Lock Waring 44 5 4
42. Is the trail straight up and down What is on top and the other side Are there ruts rocks branches or other obstacles on the path Can you safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong If every thing looks good and you feel confident shift the trans mission into a lower gear with 4L Low engaged and proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as you climb the hill Driving Up Hill Once you have determined your ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropriate gear line your vehicle up for the straightest possible run Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start up the hill Do not race forward into a steep grade the abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control If the front end begins to bounce ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground As you approach the crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over the top If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a hill ease off the accelerator and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth This will provide a fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide enough traction to complete the climb If you do not make it to the top place the vehicle in REVERSE and back straight down the grade using engine resistance along with the vehicle brakes WARNING Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn aro
43. MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Frequency kHz Bit Rate kbps 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 48 44 1 32 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 Layer 3 MPEG Sampling Specification Frequency KHz Bit Rate kbps 160 128 144 MPEG 2 Audio 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 Berea UO 68 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags D3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
44. Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor only for protection against the elements Do not mation It contains important information on rely on them to contain occupants within the cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top vehicle or to protect against injury during an Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or accident Remember always wear seat belts force any of the clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result WARNING e Do not drive the vehicle with the rear window curtain up unless the side curtains are also re moved Dangerous exhaust gases could enter the vehicle causing harm to the driver and passengers Continued CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 CAUTION Continued e Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior e The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Quick Steps to Lowering
45. Mist Feature Push down on the wiper lever to activate a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward The tilt lever is located on the steering column below the turn signal lever Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column With one hand firmly on the steering wheel move the steering column up or down as desired Pull upwards on the lever to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Be sure the steering column is locked before driving your ve hicle Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Electronic Speed Control takes over the accelerator op eration at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec of the steering wheel tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated 81
46. Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner AM or FM Button CD MODE Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files The radio can play MP3 WMA files however acceptable MP3 WMA file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 WMA files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 WMA file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 WMA DVD Video DVD R DVD RW DVD R DVD RW and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL See The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and
47. RUE ACE 456 Engine OU PII s ouacere ieee een 9 xx es 458 O Engine Air Cleaner Filter ies enn 459 O Maintenance Free Battery 249 9r cessa 459 O Air Conditioner Maintenance 460 EMBOdy LUDTCAUON 2652 400h ece eneee o Windshield Wiper Blades o Adding Washer Fluid 2 1 4 4 524444 Ros 462 EIEXhaust Oyie xax remige aru nse os 463 PRC OO Systeni c2 99 Sur im ge S ed me Se R3 465 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M RIBIJRO Syste 44446 fivPEOAX ease ue es 471 H Automatic Transmission If Equipped 473 o Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual TAn SASON 40452915 x eae ae Eon aa 475 O Manual Transmission If Equipped 475 O Transfer Case If Equipped 476 O Front Rear Axle Fluid 477 o Maintenance After Off Road Driving 477 D Appearance Care And Protection From CONOS ON 4 44 ceste 2 oa abut b p d eg 478 Dor MP 485 o Totally Integrated Power Module 485 aM Vehicle Storage cvrssirERR EE RRLSTERE RS 491 W Replacement Bulbs 492 B Bulb Replacement 0 493 Plead soy soa sh oe r Kea P Bd cS es 493 O Front Park Tur Signal amp a ice eae hae a 494 O Front Side Marker cus ced ax RR R3 494 AFront For Lamp x32 eu 94 fex dos 6 Seed eG oe 494 O Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal And Backup F5 PP ee eee ee eee eee Ss 495 O Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL 495 W Fluid Capacities 0004 496 B Fluids Lubricants And Genui
48. Refer to Mainte nance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing O D Off To reduce the potential for automatic transmission over heating select the O D OFF feature when driving in hilly areas or shift the transmission to DRIVE position 2 on more severe grades Refer to Automatic Transmis sion in Starting and Operating for further information Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions Highway Driving Reduce speed Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily 430 STARTING AND OPERATING M RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHONE ETC CAUTION Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational towing Two Wheel Drive Models Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the rear drive shaft is removed See your authorized dealer or refer to the Service Manual Towing with the rear wheels on the ground while the driveshaft
49. Roe os 62 05 101 TracLok Rear Axle axe bens xh RE mi 347 iacu COMMO s cos sc eee 2 PORC ORE Pe ae d 371 Trailer oway Control ISC pressi ure v erp ue d a 384 Tender TOWNE aa sic ioi eH Etr Rh SAC eee 416 Coolin S SII IPS sca eed u iti wees oa pe eee 429 mibi ce eek 6 a oe TR TIT IT 407 419 Minim m Requirements sess sessa aede a 423 Trailer and Tongue Weight 422 WINS PT C E 427 Trailer lowing Guide 234782624849 ridetis 420 Maier NEIEN oae edorb 62294 1 9S3 05 ha ees 420 JrdBsfoPt dS 6424546655455 04555 5neheses 476 Four Wheel Drive Operation cere n 343 a EEEELLLLSIIIILGGIIIIULIUUIIIIIIIULLLILITLLI ILEe LLLLLULLILALUILDLINCAGoOUULLIAGIALILEUI LGLUEUAWLI T AU C Go LAAL UUL GALODBLU nLL LLAALLPANA 6M4O AAe ODO OaAoOLNa GGG6 6O6 7 2 04 7 17 Mannan edes 46 sabe eo eos 6 REFS 476 Transmission POMOMAHC sin hota was 43 9 PP SNP AES 399 Maintenance amp x3xo ma er Rs 473 475 Inu uiis te EUN OA PE A eee 333 Rance HidleAalO irera do curie ee v oe 254 SUIS PT P 336 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless ENY eecdetegueuvaccveeus 23 Jransportne Pets siesat 304 3 8er an dod Ai 74 Tread Wear Indicators uiuo PR eren erben cs 398 Tap Computer g s vs sucks de ke RUE A HORS 262 263 TOP QOOUCIEE PP C 256 Trip Odometer Reset Button 254 TONORA 22 sm drei p sen 134 249 494 495 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 86 Uniform Tire Quality Grades
50. This will occur even if the message was previously cleared an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off ESP mode is intended for off road use only 4L Range AWD Models ESP Off This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4L range Whenever the vehicle is started in 4L range or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4H range or NEUTRAL to 4L range the ESP system will be in this mode In 4L range ESP and TCS except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section are turned off until the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph 48 km h At 40 mph 48 km h the normal ESP stability function ee STARTING AND OPERATING 381 WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In returns but TCS remains off When the vehicle speed drops below 35 mph 40 km h the ESP system shuts off The ESP is off at low vehicle speeds in 4L range so that it will not interfere with off road driving but the ESP function returns to provide the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph 48 km h The ESP TCS Indicator Light will always be illuminated in 4L range when ESP is off NOTE The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position This w
51. Towing Definitions 417 O Trailer Hitch Classification 419 o Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Wem KAUNOS vis ride TE RES CROSSES 420 O Trailer And Trailer Tongue Weight 422 EH Towing Requirements a ws wa x eder 423 TOWING MDS esarp Satake eee eee eee a 428 lBl Recreational Towing Behind Motorhome Etc 430 DB Two Wheel Drive Models 430 D Four Wheel Drive Models 431 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 329 STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather Interior heat buildup may cause serious injury or death Never leave children in the vehicle alone Leaving unintended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons The child or others could be seriously or fatally injured The child could oper ate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Manual Transmission If Equipped Apply the parking brake place the shift lever in NEU TRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting the vehicle This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlock ing ignition system It will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Four Wheel Drive Models Only In 4L mode this vehicle will start regardless of whether or not the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor This
52. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221 6 Ensure that the top locks into the Sunrider locking 8 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the mechanisms that are located above the front of the rear side bow until it rests on the windshield frame doors 036107424 7 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 9 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each 10 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior v o C side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To be properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223 11 Ensure that the straps are positioned correctly before Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body side pulling the sail panels over the rear roof bow 4 bow channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 4 bow will aid in reaching the channel with the retainers 036005872 036007402 224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 12 To install the side windows affix the window tem 13 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door porarily by a
53. an adverse affect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this Owner s Manual concern ing vehicles used for trailer towing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will as sist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to p
54. and Vehicle Identification Number VIN A Month Day Hour MDH number is included on this label and indicates the month day and hour of manufacture The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver passengers vehicle options trailer tongue weight and cargo The label also specifies maxi mum capacities of front and rear axle systems GAWR Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded ee STARTING AND OPERATING 415 Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck or any given vehicle can carry including the weight of the driver all passengers options and cargo Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded Each axle s GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity axle springs tires or wheels Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for in creased durability does not necessarily increase the ve hicle s GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that
55. and or accident resulting in possible serious or fatal injuries The following procedure will disable or re enable ESP functionality in the vehicle 1 Shift the transfer case into the 4H range position 2 Turn the steering wheel until it is centered and the wheels are pointed straight ahead 3 Cycle the ignition key OFF to ON 4 Wait approximately five seconds for the system bulb check 5 Turn and hold the steering wheel one half turn to the right clockwise 6 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds 7 Turn the steering wheel back to center and turn and hold an additional one half turn to the left counterclock wise ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 8 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds 9 Turn the steering wheel back to center 10 Press and hold the ESP OFF button for seven seconds 11 Cycle the ignition key to OFF After performing the ESP disable procedure correctly ESP OFF will be displayed in the odometer for approxi mately 12 seconds each time the ignition is moved to ON Repeating the ESP disable procedure will re enable nor mal ESP operation ESP BAS Warning Light The malfunction indicator lamp for the ESP is combined with the BAS indicator The ESP BAS Warning Light in the instrument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position It should go out with the engine running ESP BAS If the ESP BAS Warning Light
56. and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider installing mud or stone shields behind each wheel e Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint or equivalent on scratches or chips as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel and Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal pol ishes Only MOPAR cleaners or equivalent are recom mended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 CAUTION When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve hicle read the installation instructions carefully Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery WARNINCG Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many a
57. as those maintained by the U S govern ment and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver ve hicle or crash will be treated confidentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler Group LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Data parameters that are recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system e Vehicle speed e Engine RPM e Brake switch status e Pedal position e And other configuration Child Restraint Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it parameters depending on vehicle Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck led up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats
58. belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an autho rized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect the tread and sidewall for cuts and cracks Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight pa
59. button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type or undefined Adult Hits Adlt Hit None 16 Digit Character Display News News Program Type 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 16 Digit Character Display By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode Program Type If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
60. by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint an chorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat An chorage System Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger airbag unless the airbag is turned off An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE xe Standards The manufacturer also recommends that WARNING you try a child restraint in the vehicle seats where you e Improper installation can lead to failure of an will use it before you buy it infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex e The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits actly when installing an infant or child restraint A rearward facing infant restraint should only be Carefully follow the instructions that come with the used in a rear seat A rearward facing infant re restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy not work when you need it ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or fatal injury to the infant e The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Bot
61. can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur e The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 e Any engine warning lamps come on e The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pressed To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle Upper Half Door Window Removal If Equipped Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON position 1 Grasp the half door window and pull upward NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON position in order to drive the vehicle DOORS CAUTION Careless handling and storage of the removable door panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicles interior ee THINGS TO KNOW
62. could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK prior to rotating the key to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK Brake Transmission Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System BTSI that holds the shift lever in the PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position To move the shift lever out of the PARK position the ignition switch must be turned to either the ON or START position engine running or not and the brake pedal must be pressed 338 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override Your vehicle may be equipped with a shift lock manual override The manual override may be used in the event that the shift lever should fail to move from PARK with the key in the ON position and the brake pedal pressed To operate the shift lock manual override perform the following steps 1 Turn the key to the ON position but do not start the engine 2 Firmly set the parking brake 3 Using a flat bladed screwdriver carefully remove the shift lock manual override c
63. edge of the side window side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle 7 Beginning from the rear lower corner completely unzip the window NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 8 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 10 As you begin to lower the top fold the sail panels so 11 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed that they rest on top of the soft top unless the hard top is being installed To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 81925d12 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 12 Completely release the latches from the loops on the 13 Make sure the plastic sleeves are slid rearward over windshield frame If your vehicle is not equipped with the Sunrider link Sunrider Models only the Sunrider package proceed to Step 15 eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 14 Unlatch the side bows from both door rails Sun NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera rider Models only tion 15 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted brake light Move to the front of the vehicle Grasp the side bow
64. following items e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window e Two rear window roll up straps e Two Sunrider secure straps if equipped 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Using a rubber mallet carefully tap the knuckles from the left and right metal pivot brackets Remove the soft top from the vehicle and store in a clean dry location oa c P 7 A 035605928 6 Reinstall the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Installa tion in this section 5 Unzip the zipper on the sport bar cover to expose the pivot brackets Remove the brackets using a 130 Torx head driver Recover and re zip the sports bar cover Store the pivot brackets and screws in a safe place ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Installing the Soft Top NOTE The following procedures are for first time set up only For future soft top procedures refer to Soft Top in this section 1 Locate and remove the following items prior to hard top removal e Right and left door frames e Door frame attachment knobs four for two door models six for four door models e Right and left quarter windows e Rear window 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section
65. front bumper or vehicle body struc ture Continued 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee bolsters e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbag system ready to inflate for your protection in an impact The airbag system is designed to be maintenance free If any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the system promptly e Does not come on during the six to eight seconds after the ignition switch is first turned on e Remains on after the six to eight second interval e Comes on for any period of time while driving Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see list below in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment if applicable and up to a quarter second of either high speed deceleration data or change in velocity during and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and is otherwise unavailable NOTE 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airb
66. functioning the ESP TCS Indicator Light will flash the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying TSC is disabled when the ESP system is in the Partial Off or Full Off modes WARNING If TSC activates while driving slow the vehicle down stop at the nearest safe location and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway STARTING AND OPERATING 385 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE e P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H Tire Markings e European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H e LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LI Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced 9 ry 5 ALET ETE wo 054903773 1 U S DOT Safety Stan 4 Maximum Load dards Code TIN ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure T Eo 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and e
67. grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK With a manual transmis sion shift the transmission into first gear And with four wheel drive vehicles make sure the Towing Requirements Tires transfer case is not in N Neutral Always block This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact or chock the trailer wheels P 8 P spare tire GCWR must not be exceeded Total weight must be distributed between the tow Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe vehicle and the trailer such that the following four and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to 1 GVWR ating for proper tire inflation procedures 2 GTW Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres 3 GAWR sures before trailer usage Continued 426 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General required when towing a trailer with electronically Information in Starting and Operating for the actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with proper inspection procedure a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic mE ler ex When replacing tires
68. if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 1 6 km 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light quA This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine is started if the bulb does not come on have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 10 High Beam Indicator z This indicator shows that the high beam head lights are on Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever towards you to switch the headlights back to low beam If the driver s door is open and the 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M headlights or park lights are left on the high beam indicator light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system reservoir BRAKE If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fl
69. in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred You can say O letter O for 0 zero Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Phone Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 e Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect Phone When this happens the conn
70. information 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more than 3 16 in 4 76 mm below the bottom of the hole Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the lubricant has become contaminated with water If con taminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately Transfer Case If Equipped Fluid Level Check The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the fill hole A when the vehicle is in a level position Adding Fluid Fluid should be added only at filler hole until fluid begins to run out of the hole Drain First remove the fill plug B then the drain plug C The recommended tightening torque for the drain and fill plugs is 15 to 25 ft lbs 20 to 34 N m ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 CAUTION When replacing the plugs do not overtighten them You could damage them and cause them to leak Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Front Rear Axle Fluid Fluid Level Check Lubricant should be at the b
71. is appropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation 416 STARTING AND OPERATING xe The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer cial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not been ex ceeded The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over front and rear axle Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR If so weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distributions can have
72. is connected can result in severe transmission damage WARNING If the driveshaft is removed the vehicle can roll even if the transmission is in PARK which could cause serious injury or death The parking brake must be firmly engaged and the wheels chocked during driveshaft removal and installa tion The parking brake must remain engaged unless the vehicle is securely and properly connected to the tow vehicle or the driveshaft is completely reinstalled See your authorized dealer for proper driveshaft removal and reinstallation procedures including flange orientation alignment use of thread locking compound proper bolt torque specifications etc ee STARTING AND OPERATING 431 Four Wheel Drive Models Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for NOTE The transfer case must be shifted into N Neu IOXIES OD SOMME tral automatic transmission must be shifted into PARK CAUTION and manual transmission must be placed in gear not in NEUTRAL for recreational towing It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that Shifting Into Neutral N WARNINCG You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the 3 Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission the transfer case is fully in N Neutral be
73. latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position strap Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in e In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the a collision lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out Vehicles With Rear Web Buckles That May Need To Be Twisted Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in
74. lug nuts with the lu AEN manual transmission into REVERSE wrench turning them counterclockwise NOTE If you have added aftermarket accessories to the 4 Turn the ignition to LOCK spare tire mounted carrier it cannot exceed a gross 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher E of 50 Ibs 23 kg including the weight of the spare a Beck hottie tontand near ore l wheel diagonally opposite of the jack ing position For example if changing 1 Park on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery x Be a tront Bre block the Jett Tear 6 areas RR Preparations For Jacking R aAA part Ts E aiii Fa i g METTE bai aad E i Uil i WARNING NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the when the vehicle is being jacked vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jac
75. oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 Engine Oil Filter Selection All of the manufacturer s engines have a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replace ment The quality of replacement filters varies consider ably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNING The air cleaner can provide protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless it is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories con tain
76. on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be tween cycles desirable Move the lever to the delay position then select the delay interval by turning the end of the lever The delay can be regulated between 2 to 30 seconds between cycles 031507503 Front Wiper Control Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the lever toward you and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate for two or three wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles and then turn off WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use 031507504 Mist Control NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid
77. particularly those used for braking steering transmis sion and transfer case shifting Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces Your driving skills will improve with experience When driving off road or working the vehicle don t overload the vehicle or expect the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics Always observe federal state provincial and local laws wherever you drive As with other vehicles of this type failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or an accident Refer to On Road Off Road Driving Tips in Starting And Operating for further information ee INTRODUCTION 5 This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publica tions carefully Following the instructions and recom mendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine MOPAR p
78. pinch the grips on hose connector and pull 7 l E 035707358 l 11 Remove the hard top from the vehicle Place the hard top on a soft surface to prevent damage 10 Close the swing gate Rear Hard Top Installation NOTE If the door frames are installed from soft top usage they must be removed prior to installation of the hard top 1 Inspect the hard top seals for damage and replace if necessary 2 Install the hard top using the same steps for removal in reverse order Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush with the body at the sides and check to ensure that there is a uniform gap between the lift glass and hard top NOTE e The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to the body should be torqued to 66 in Ib 22 in Ib 7 5 N m 2 5 N m e Itis not necessary to pinch connection when reinstall ing washer hose Push on until click is heard 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M DOOR FRAME CAUTION Continued e Careless handling and storage of the removable door frame s may damage the seals causing water WARNINCG Do not drive your vehicle on pavement with the door frame s removed as you will lose the protection that they can provide This procedure is furnished for use during off road operation only to leak into the vehicle s interior e The door frame s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle
79. post of the discharged battery The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury 5 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence 6 Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery 7 Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery 8 Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery 9 Disconnect the positive end of the jumper cable from the positive post of the discharged vehicle 10 Reinstall the air intake duct If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer CAUTION Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use i e cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447 CAUTION Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle strand
80. s interior CAUTION Door Frame Removal Two Door Models Unscrew and remove the door frame attachment knobs two per side Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew e Opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the em front of the door frame 3 Pull the frame toward you with your rearward hand to remove the frame from the vehicle DECRE Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used storage Store in a secure location 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Door Frame Installation Two Door Models 1 Unfold door frame and unscrew thumbscrews 2 Set the door frame pin into the hole on top of the body side behind the door opening Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an event of an accident a loose door frame many cause personal injury If removed always store the door frames outside of the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 3 After the door frame pin has been set into the body 5 Starting with the front knob screw in and tighten both side hole carefully set the front of the door frame into the knobs Repeat on the other side rubber sea
81. s seat belts Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time For some older child restraints many child restraint manufacturers offer add on tether strap kits or retro fit kits You are urged to take advantage of all the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave an unattended child in the vehicle All three rear seating positions of the four door model have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat ing LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments The two door model can accommodate flexible LATCH compatible child seats in the two outboard seating positions only
82. satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands Track to change the track e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e Channel Number to change the channel by its e Main Menu to switch to the main menu spoken number e Next Channel to select the next channel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Memo Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In P l Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands e New Memo to record a new memo During the e SIUS O E ere ate recording you may press the Voice Command VR System Setup button to stop recording You proceed by saying one of To switch to system setup say Setup In this mode you the following commands may say the following commands Save to save the memo e Language German Continue to continue recording e Language Dutch Delete to delete the recording e Language Italian e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Language English During the playback you may press the Voice Command amp vr button to stop playing memos You proceed by saying one of the following commands e Language Spanish e Language French Repeat to repeat a memo e Tutorial
83. structions for cleaning Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 WARNINCG Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioner and seat belt retractor assem bly replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions e Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off e Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed e Unlock the doors automatically Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the
84. strument cluster comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position The light should go out with the engine running If the ESP BAS warning light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the BAS system If this light stays illuminated have the ESP and BAS checked at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Electronic Brake Control System in Starting And Operating for further infor mation WARNING If a warning light remains on the system may not be working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or BAS Under certain driving conditions where ESP or BAS would be beneficial you if you have not adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to account for the lack of the feature may be in acci dent 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 30 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Light This light informs you of a problem with the A Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected while the engine is run ning the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the shift lever is placed in the PARK position The light should turn off If the light remains on with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable however see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light continues
85. supported In addition variable bit 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre quency in P Rote bps 320 256 224 192 160 126 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios MPEG 1 Audio Layer 3 48 44 1 32 MPEG 2 Audio Layer 3 24 22 05 16 Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUME
86. the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell tale Light will turn OFF as long as no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information General Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the following licenses KR55120123 2671 5120123 United States Canada STARTING AND OPERATING 407 FUEL REQUIREMENTS All engines are designed to meet all emis sions regulations and provide excellent 87 fuel economy and performance when us ing high quality unleaded regular gaso 800dfabe line having an octane rating of 87 The u
87. the vehicle if necessary The key to a safe crossing is the water depth current and bottom conditions On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle Be sure to consider this when deter mining the depth and the ability to safely cross Crossing Puddles Pools Flooded Areas or Other Standing Water Puddles pools flooded or other standing water areas normally contain murky or muddy waters These water types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an accurate water depth approach angle and bottom condition Murky or muddy water holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering This makes for a faster cleaner and easier vehicle recovery If you are able to determine you can safely cross than proceed using the low and slow method ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 CAUTION Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator Crossing Ditches Streams Shallow Rivers or Other Flowing Water Flowing water can be extremely dangerous Never at tempt to cross a fast running stream or river even in shallow water Fast moving water can easily push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control Even in very shallow water a high current can still wash the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle damage w
88. the circuit that must be e When installing the Integrated Power Module corrected cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so VEHICLE STORAGE may allow water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to protect your battery You may Continued Remove Cartridge fuse 15 in the Power Distribution Center labeled Ignition Off Draw IOD e Store the removed IOD fuse in the Power Distribution Center location 11 labeled IOD Storage 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again REPLACEMENT BULBS Bulb Type 658 Interior Lights Auto Trans Indicator Lamp Heater Control Lamps 2 i 422 see repr E oes ex Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp Rear Window Defogger and Rear Wash Wipe i Soundbar Dome Dti vows a rur RAP IR pen ek Bulbs only available from authorized dealer Exterior Lights Bulb Type Packup Lamps 2 cad
89. the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and not inter preted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas a
90. the following beep say Redial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e The Uconnect Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect Phone and transfer of the call to the cellular phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the cellular phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF Uconnect Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Continue to follow the system pr
91. the seatback rearward toward the rear of the vehicle to tilt the entire seat forward Easy Entry Combination Lever 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE e If equipped with combination lever the seatback will return to its first locked position The recliner handle will have to be actuated to adjust the seatback to the desired reclined position e The front passenger seats have a track memory which returns the seat to just past the halfway point of the track regardless of its original position e The recliner and easy entry levers should not be used during the automatic returning of the seat to its sitting ip position Easy Entry Seat With Combination Lever 1 To return the seat to a sitting position rotate the seatback upright until it locks Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a rear impact The head restraint should be adjusted so 2 Push the seat rearward until the track locks the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head To remove the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the large restraint to it s highest position push in both buttons at button located on the base of the head restraint and the base of each head restraint rod and simultaneously push downward on the head restr
92. then place the shift lever in the PARK position 340 STARTING AND OPERATING See WARNINCG e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than the idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal REVERSE This range is for moving the vehicle backward Use only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL This range is used when vehicle is standing for pro longed periods with engine running Engine may be started in this range Set the parking brake if you must leave the vehicle NOTE Towing coasting or driving the vehicle for any other reason with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting and Operating and Towing a Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information OVERDRIVE This range is used for most city and highway driving The transmission contains an electronically controlled fourth gear fifth gear if equipped Overdrive and will
93. to a competent mechanic Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident N E N A N C E S C H E D T 1 E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your hid PDT hes os uee Gee Sareea ees 521 O Prepare For The Appointment 521 D Prepare AA Lit uade doped AA Rear d 4 ars 521 o Be Reasonable With Requests 521 W if You Need Assistance 521 O Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 522 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 522 E In Mexico Contact su s uus 2 seat Xa x4 XA 3 D Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY 523 petyice CONUGCE 4 eas enc E ea edn ws X dee 523 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 524 EM MOPAR Parts aeos becas sand eue god 524 W Reporting Safety Defects 524 O In The 50 United States And Washington Cre eee eee ee ee eee eT 524 0 In Canada 520 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ee W Publication Order Forms 525 O Trachon Grades uos ox 9s ES PN ENSS T 527 lll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire O lemperature Grades vues 9 93 0 3 dare si 528 Quality GGaless PT 527 Tread Weal 4x cae aX agam wseuwckgoGef eg adis 527 ee FYOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 521 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAIN
94. to flash when the engine is running immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance an elevated rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing The light will come on when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an autho rized dealer 31 Compass Mini Trip Computer Display If Equipped When the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the Mini Trip Computer messages Refer to Mini Trip Computer 32 Compass Mini Trip Computer Button If Equipped Press this button to switch between the different functions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 COMPASS AND TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Compass Trip Computer is located in the instru ment cluster It features a driver interactive display dis plays information such as outside temperature compass direction and trip information at Compass Trip Computer Display Control Buttons NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving Press and release the left button on the instrument cluster to access the computer displays Pr
95. turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth for additional traction Mud holes pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck They are normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting stuck As a good practice before entering any mud hole get out and determine how deep it is if there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if stuck Sand Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire pressure When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail maintain your vehicle s momentum and do not stop The key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pressure accelerating slowly avoiding abrupt maneu vers and maintaining the vehicle s momentum If you are going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi 103 kPa to allow for a greater tire surface area Reduced tire pressure will drastically improve your traction and handling while driving on the soft sand but you must return the tires to normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard surfaces Be sure you have a way to reinflate the tires prior to reducing the pressure 356 STARTING AND OPERATING ee CAUTION Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and total loss of air pressure To reduce the risk of tire unseating while at a reduced tire pressure reduce your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu
96. up on the switch briefly To open the window part way press to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop The power window switches remain active for two minutes after the ignition has been turned off Opening either front door will cancel this feature Rear Power Windows Four Door Models Only The rear passenger window switches are located on the back of the center floor console Rear Power Window Switches Four Door Models 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down in certain open or partially open posi tions This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting window opening REAR SWING GATE The swing gate can be unlocked by using the key Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors To open the swing gate press the button on the gate handle Gate Handle NOTE Close the rear flip up window before attempting to close the swing gate hard top models only CAUTION Do not press on rear wiper blade when closing the rear flip up window as damage to the blade will result WARNING Driving with the flip up window open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could b
97. webbing from the retractor to route it through the belt path of the child restraint Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Next extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor As the belt retracts you will hear a ratcheting sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 2 Finally pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary To attach a Child Restraint tether strap Route the tether strap over the seatback and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat For the outboard seating positions route the tether under the head rest and attach the hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat Tether Strap Mounting Two Door Models 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor positions directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether e If the belt still can t be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the
98. wheel drive vehicles and four wheel drive vehicles in 2H range have two operating modes 4H Range 4WD Models or 2WD Models On This is the normal operating mode for ESP in 4H and 2WD vehicles Whenever the vehicle is started or the transfer case if equipped is shifted from 4L range or NEUTRAL back to 4H range the ESP system will be in this mode This mode should be used for most all driving situations The ESP should only be turned to Partial Off or Full Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF switch When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESP has been disabled and the ESP TCS Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESP function normally This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is required to gain traction To turn ESP on again momen tarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation ESP OFF Switch STARTING AND OPERATING 379 NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch Once the situation requiring ESP to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESP back on by momentarily pressing the ESP
99. while in NEUTRAL regardless of clutch position To prevent this do not attempt to roll down a hill simply by putting the transmission in NEUTRAL and letting gravity act on the vehicle as the HSA will prevent the vehicle from rolling Instead use the appropriate gear for moving in the desired direction ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 WARNING Continued e HSA is not a parking brake If you stop the vehicle on a hill without putting the transmission in PARK and using the parking brake it will roll Towing with HSA HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade when pulling a trailer WARNING e If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer your trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch If so when the brake pedal is released there may not be enough brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer ona HSA Off hill and this could cause a collision with another If you wish to turn off the HSA system follow this vehicle or object behind you In order to avoid procedure rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas ing the brake pedal Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle Continued down the hill and could cause a collision with another vehicle or object Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle 1 Start wi
100. will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the amp button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cellular phone Press the amp button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the VR button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the amp button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hol
101. with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 6 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ee Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen
102. your authorized dealer is recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 331 If Engine Fails to Start Without Tip Start Manual Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the WARNING Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce HEN dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all e Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into th i e an e way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to fuel 4 h start the vehicle This could result in a flash fire PEPS TEE CUM ICE XU ec acess HIE causing serious personal injury engine is flooded Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get l it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic CO UON transmission cannot be started this way Unburned To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle This type of start can be dan gerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Start ing in What To Do In Emergencies for further information engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine has been flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when t
103. your cellular phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the cellular phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of cellular phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the EVR button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the EVR button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uc
104. 000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 es STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Tire Terminology and Definitions B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is a structural member of the body located between the front and rear door of a four door vehicle running from the sill to the roof Cold Tire Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or KPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The max inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle showing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire size and the recommended inflation pressure 3900 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire Placard Location Tire Placard Location Four Door Models Tire Placard Location Two Door Models Tire and Loading Information Placard Ciber O ARIS Bg s PRB BRI
105. 13 Amp auxiliary power outlets that can provide power for accessories designed for use with the standard power outlet adapters The power outlet located in the lower portion of the instrument panel has a snap on plastic cap so that it can be covered when not in use When the optional cigar lighter heating element is used in the left side power outlet it heats when pushed in and pops out automatically when ready for use To preserve the heating element do not hold the lighter in the heating position NOTE Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced 034609097 Power Outlets The left side power outlet is powered when the key is in the ON or ACC positions The right side power outlet is powered directly from the battery power available at all times Items plugged into this power outlet may discharge the battery and or prevent the engine from starting ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING CAUTION To avoid serious injury or death e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure power from the vehicle s batt
106. 3 Install the door frames Refer to Door Frame in this section 4 If the soft top has been removed follow these steps to reinstall the soft top If the soft top is on the vehicle proceed to step 5 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M a If the pivot brackets have been removed unzip the sport bar covers and attach the pivot brackets to the sports bar with the four screws that were removed using a 130 Torx head driver Re cover and re zip the sport bar covers D 035605928 b Lay the soft top into the rear of the vehicle with the bows pointing forward and the curved portion of the bows facing upward c Tap the knuckles on the side with a rubber mallet to reattach them to the metal pivot brackets ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 d Screw the pivot screws back into place using a 130 CAUTION Torx head driver Secure them until they are snug being careful not to cross thread the screws or over Do not overtighten the screws You can strip the tighten screws if they are overtightened 5 Remove the swing gate bar black metal bar for bottom of rear window and set aside NOTE Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift the top 6 Unsnap and remove the black boot cover This cover should be discarded It was intended as a protective cover for shipping only NOTE Avisual instruction sheet is enclosed in the
107. 350 Ibs 159 kg AWD 3 597 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Automatic 3 73 Four Door X Model 7 932 E 32 sq 3 500 P 350 Ibs 159 kg AWD 3 598 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 3 8L Manual 3 21 Four Door Sahara 5 625 32 sq 7 1 000 E 100 Ibs 45 kg Model 4WD 2 551 kg 2 97 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3 73 Four Door Sahara 8 125 T 32 sq 3 500 E 350 Ibs 159 kg Model 4WD 3 685 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 Kg 422 STARTING AND OPERATING Axle Model Engine Transmission 3 8L Automatic 3 73 Four Door Sahara Model 4WD 3 8L Manual 4 10 Four Door Rubicon Model 4WD 3 8L Automatic 4 10 Four Door Rubicon Model 4WD GCWR Gross Combined Wt Rating 8 127 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg 3 686 kg 2 97 sq m 1 587 kg 8 248 Ibs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg 3 741 kg 2 97 sq m 1587 kg 8 249 lbs 32 sq ft 3 500 Ibs 350 Ibs 159 kg 3 742 kg 2 97 sq m 1587 kg Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Max Trailer Tongue Wt See Note Frontal Area Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds NOTE The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Safety Information in Starting and Operating for further information Trailer and Trailer Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the fr
108. 4 Hook the header latches to the loops on the wind shield frame close latches and return the sun visors to their original positions 5 Slide the plastic sleeve rearward over the Sunrider link SUNRIDER FOUR DOOR MODELS IF EQUIPPED CAUTION Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle 232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Opening the Sunrider 3 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift l the top 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side ibn d 2 Release the header latches from the loops on the windshield frame 036007403 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233 4 Fold back the front section of the top and gently rest 5 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as shown the header on top of the rear portion of the deck Enter the vehicle and move the material into two folds 234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Secure the top by using the two provided straps Each strap will wrap around the side bow and Velcro to itself use one strap on each side of the vehicle 036207426 Oo Closing the Sunrider Perform the above steps in the opposite order NOTE Failure to fold the fabr
109. 4 339 General Information 17 115 407 Class Clean P 481 Gross Axle Weight Rating 415 417 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 414 417 CVV 25 54 ee eet eee ee ete ese ee noes 414 536 INDEX M Hands Free Phone Uconnect 86 LIAR AOD was eke sober dar Seb eo Hee pees 156 Hard lop Modular 22 554 545 Genter eeues 156 Hard Top Removal 605 4ssi 4s4e0ds0d08ees 164 Hazard Warme Flasher ia iore e tex e abs 436 Head Restraints 445 OR Oe x de ee Rod bt rine 124 ead Rests CT 124 Headlights DUD RCDISCEIIOHD oan dp w Fe d werd seen Bae ds 493 Diner OWIION a3 ucc ey CP ardor m doe den 139 Mcr AP Pr 493 gi P M 133 POWOD 315 Heater Engine Block 24939324292 83193 332 Higi Beam JOdIedO ane a5 9 S5e ean mars a 249 Hill Start ASsiSt a ae 9 9 Eh eee ee oe SN 373 Hitches TANCE TOWNE 4425 668 eu ober ES TESORO 419 Holde CUP asa depete eee Bead HEH 4H shat 148 Hood Release s ee a 0 999 RETE RE oe oe EE ra 191 Hydraulic Clutch Fluid o544o0 s3 6056 24 es 475 ISOM rr t 12 Key Gites eteete eben ages a VUE A nt gees 12 lenition Key Removal asse x at a gets 12 DHliuntipAIed EAU sS x95 3 aban RUPEE RR tana 19 Immobilizer Sentry Key a x22 sd ade retiras 14 Mn ROSAE vaca visos eo D uer 9 EEE pup o PEE 63 Inflation Pressure ites s 2s amp gto rac pci 395 Inside Rearview WHRHOP 4 04 d aie o oa 6 Bae emer 84
110. 5 psi 241 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 30 psi 207 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi 179 kPa This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 30 psi 207 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires have been inflated to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressure value CAUTION e The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels The TPMS pressures have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replace ment equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result Continued 404 STARTING AND OPERATING xe CAUTION Continued e The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure RO correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not
111. 50 to 70 millisec onds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger front airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle e he Side Impact SRS Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side airbags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items previously mentioned Based on the severity and type of collision the side airbag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is trig gered releasing a quantity of non toxic gas The inflating side airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The side airbags fully inflate in about 10 milliseconds The side airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates This especially applies to children e The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the kne
112. 6 58452445854 ems 251 Pack B ues ses e 99 3 Vei a9 qb 495 Brake Assist Warning sx aceee x een 80466 261 383 Drake VOCI o 2 3 59 cone 4 93m eg ied PR 250 Dub Replacement 21 2944 9 bud eur muri eS 493 Soo ees Eee aA Se 197 Center Mounted Stop 495 Check Engine Malfunction Indicator 259 eun 244662405464 6 HEE ee eee eee ees 259 Daytime SOBRE woes see aparin irks 3 136 Dimmer Switch Headlight 25 ie ekeeek RS 135 538 INDEX M Electronic Stability Program ESP Mda 4 4 2 9 EE UESTRE eee BUS 261 383 Electronic Throttle Control Warning 262 Engine lemperature Warming 2x9 ee 202 EXOUOP come ueobs 6eeeeda gees ay ete 3 935 78 BOS i 62 ont Paka oe oe eee eo a ee 135 494 Hazard Warming Flasher i2 te 436 Headin OWI x scsescqs eden 4 qu d dee anaes 133 oe ei ccu boe wur eg Qupd qae Su e E S as 493 Ido Bedi 4 46 ta poscat i Stant o rc dora a qr des 249 Higi beo IaeiedfoE ados ve y aves cae Peewee 249 Instroment CIUBIOE us cu s eh bh ALEGRE RES 133 lucu C 136 Lights On Reminder 3 29 3a 993 e td 803 ked 135 Ford sikerse ae E a E a a 248 TE EAR 25 ea EAR 249 POS aces doa Rd TE Ve d E E E bad 135 Rear oes EEEE TTE ETTET ETE 495 Rear latl EP potas Meese ees 495 Seat Belt Reminder 249 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 252 i P LETT 493 Side Marker xung duc xxx eee bee ae Bes 495 Theft Alarm Security Alarm vk dose aon 252 Tire Pressure Monit
113. 60 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures If Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features If Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message wi
114. 90 035707991 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 Insert the left side Freedom panel into the bag with the Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom bag closed latches facing upward NOTE Ensure the front Freedom panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag 035707993 035707992 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Install the seat attachment strap at the top of the bag Lift the Freedom bag into the vehicle with the hooks and through the loops straps facing the back of the rear seat Attach the clips at the bottom of the bag to the child restraint anchorages located at the base of the rear seat 035707994 035707995 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 Wrap the upper strap around the rear head restraints and Front Panel s Installation loop the strap through the buckle Pull on the strap to tighten the Freedom bag securely against the rear seat NOTE Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 1 Install the right panel first then the left panel 2 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order 035707996 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Front Panel s Installation with Rear Hard Top Removed 1 Turn the left and right panels over and move the spacer block located on the rear of the panel upwa
115. 96 81caad41 Use this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumula tion of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Recirculation Control 81caad32 Press this button to choose be tween outside air intake or recir culation of the air inside the ve hicle A light will illuminate when you are in Recirculation mode Only use the Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial start up in very hot or humid weather UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321 NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode Air Conditioning may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may l occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended Normal Operation Press this button to engage t
116. ANCE 527 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics
117. BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 Upper Half Door Window Installation If Equipped 1 Grasp the half door window and line up pins into pockets in lower door 2 Push down to ensure the half door window is fully seated Front Door Removal 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver 2 Unplug the wiring harness connector under the instru ment panel by pressing the tab at the side of the connector and pulling to disconnect 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected 1 Harness Connector 2 Body Hook 3 Door Harness Strap 3 Unhook the door strap from the body hook Be careful not to allow the door to swing fully open as the mirror may damage paint 4 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 1 Remove the hinge pin screws from the upper and lower outside hinges using a 150 Torx head driver THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Paaran aiana teeta n ES p Qu m uerius Slide the
118. Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warra
119. E Boo Sy REAR 3 1 2 P195 70R14 T125 70D15 3 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION an 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires STARTING AND OPERATING 391 Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement Ihe combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The 392 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed
120. EENTLIEREMEHT i TUE LIS LCS aed AE A WARNING WICKER ROLLOVER MIEN f EFOD LEPET BLHRLNSRS A ERCETUVE JPEG d J n TIRE LEN MA ORG PR E RETE ET LA VITESSE ELO BEA E TOUR BOITER LES Con TUE P6 MUTE COME b nr Rut aL EDNSERCNT a LUSKT FOCHLE Uf BL CWHLIES A MULL TOW Eri THER rmPCririal Fi i 010308790 Rollover Warning Label Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt Always buckle up HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual LE WATER I4 FUEL irm te i D e Wd a c TURA SIGNALS yiii AR T DOOR LOCK a D e Wa 0 20 G nam LOWER SEAT M bed gee TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR hee fe lt T Z Jj ao n FLUID LEVEL E A UENDE DOWN CON TROL E de i WIHCHEHIELD LFTGATE RELEASE ELECTRONIC ENGINE DIL nn DN es Hal REAR Fo LAMP E DEFROST AND VENTILA
121. ENT PANEL 309 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ignition is OFF Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio Uconnect Multimedia SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ RADIOS ONLY Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from it
122. Emissions Control System Maintenance 500 O Required Maintenance Intervals Bl Maintenance Schedule 500 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 500 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the emissions control system These and all other maintenance services in cluded in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance On Non EVIC equipped vehicles CHAngE OIL will flash in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime will sound indicating t
123. FUEL RUN LMP Yellow PUMP Diesel Lift 19 25 Amp Auto Shut Down ASD Pump DSL LIFT Natural 1 and 2 PUMP Export Onl 20 15 Amp Cabin Compartment SiS Sl Blue Node Interior Light 10 Amp _ Ignition Switch Feed CCN INT LIGHT Red Wireless Module Switch Bank SW 10 Amp PCM Feed TCM BANK Red M21 20 Amp Auto Shut Down ASD as 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse Blue Diagnostic Feed Red ASST Heater Ventila tion Air Conditioning Module HVAC MOD Headlamp Wash HDLP WASH Compass COMPAS M31 20 Amp Backup Lamps B U Yellow LAMPS M32 10 Amp Occupant Restraint Red Controller ORC TT EUROPE 20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow 10 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Red ABS Electronic Stabil ity Program ESP Stop Lamp Switch STP LP SW Fuel Pump Rly Hi Control troller GPEC 37 Red troller NGC Global Powertrain Engine Con 36 EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 CAUTION Continued e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse M38 25 Amp Lock Unlock Motors Natural LOCK UNLOCK MTRS CAUTION may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in
124. For example the entry John Doe may have a ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 cellular and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Names to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the AVR button while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work cellular pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME e The Uconnect Phone will
125. HE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3 Release the header latches and leave the hooks in the assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft loops on the windshield top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow the half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side TUN 4 Open the swing gate ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls swing gate brackets will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch Ing 81b34aa7 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear 9 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body
126. HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the en gine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Disposal of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Engine Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating tempera ture the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature
127. ICLE M 13 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed 81926461 Cee Me Caan soot ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 14 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends at the lower left corner of the rear window opening Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 15 Run the zipper fully around to the right side of the window 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 16 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the 18 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to swing gate brackets their secured position 81926512 17 Apply downward pressure on the top corner of the rear soft top bow 3 bow then complete attaching the sail panel retainers into the body side channel ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS Place the vehicle in a warm area Pull steadily on the top Please visit the owner s section of Jeep com for instruc fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and tional videos the top can then be snapped into place If the tempera ture is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an a
128. ING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained
129. Instructions Precautions O Shift Positions O Shifting Procedure W Trac Lok Rear Axle If Equipped Bl Axle Lock Tru Lok9 Rubicon Models W Rear Axle Lock Four Wheel Drive Non Rubicon Models If Equipped ll Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect It EOuiBDed 724634 desir S EUER eee sue ll On Road Driving Tips ll Off Road Driving Tips 399 O Side Step Removal If Equipped 352 H The Basics Of Off Road Driving 353 XO When To Use 4L Low Range 354 O Simultaneous Brake And Throttle OPIU e e aa e e oho hake 354 O Driving In Snow Mud And Sand 354 O Crossing Obstacles Rocks And Other High OUS 6 4 5 ERA AAR REY SUCHE GREPERASPTS S 356 PTOI hse 4 PR E HORROR SY Run 358 H Driving Through Water cox 2299 atr 361 O After Driving Off Road 363 W Power Steering 00000008 365 H Power Steering Fluid Check 22 2e 365 aM Parking Brake desciende en 366 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Mm Anti Lock Brake System as RR RE RR ES 369 H Tire Terminology And Definitions 389 W Electronic Brake Control System 371 O Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 423699 390 O Anti Lock Brake System ABS 371 W Tires General Information 394 B Traction Control System TCS 371 O Tire Pressure osa woe eee ove eke ae R 394 oO Brake Assist System BAS 9 2 O Tire Inflation Pressures
130. KS C I9 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 19 Remote Staktine SYSTEM aureae e soper iam awe oats 24 Replacement Bulbs 344 lt 5 such RA ex danas 492 Replacement Keys Pm 15 Replacement Parts 232 29 a 1 RE sd sees 454 Replacement Tites sace doin n eR e 3 93 sae has 400 Reporting Safety Defects x 2 ccr ete hoo 524 Restraint Head 5 252c S ER RR See eS 124 Restraints Child 4 4694 EX 9 3 62 66 Restraints Occupant a sop sotdobare 49049 8 0055 es 37 Rotation Tires saaa 401 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle a arc d 77 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 78 Safety Defects Reporting x ci0 deeds obo adda 524 Safety Exhaust Gas a ceo ee scudo ea ea e iie 76 Safety Information Tite seias ee duane s ER ests 385 vola MU 4244450544648 4 outa gas gee eens 75 Satellite Kadic A tenna vus evade daewoo eens 311 Satellite Radio Uconnect studios 309 Schedule Maintenance uon zeit UR ws 500 Seat Belt Reminder 22422 2369 9r RAE RAS 47 Seat Belts llle 39 77 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage A And Pregnant WOMEN oai sere 9e rean 48 Child Restraint s 32 2 MOLLIOR BRE RECESSO voi 62 72 EAU 2446604 654 645 355555 E 49 FROOG OCA a2 339 4E RT RESISTE SS SURE ER 39 MPE CHON 23 55855 teehee E EISE ee ees Ka 77 a ALLLALLILL LCD U H4 JAGUAGUOL GSAo0o0 0DLLILEA LLLI UAGMUG ALGAGd A LLA Maintenance Qua se xk ee 6b 933x944 99 23 482 Pretensioners ees 47 ReMnGer 4
131. LE 473 WARNING Continued e Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami nate the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in an accident Automatic Transmission If Equipped Selection of Lubricant It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor mance Use only manufacturer s recommended transmis sion fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion It is important that the transmission fluid be main tained at the prescribed level using the recommended fluid CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer s recommended fluid will result in more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Main taining Your Vehicle for further information Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal operating temperature 180 F 82 C This occurs after at least 15 miles 25 km of driving At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be tween the fingertips 4 4 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE xe To properly check the automatic transmission fluid
132. Low range Simultaneous Brake and Throttle Operation Many off road driving conditions require the simulta neous use of the brake and throttle two footed driving When climbing rocks logs or other stepped objects using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from jerking or lurching This technique is also used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a steep incline Driving In Snow Mud and Sand Snow In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at slower speeds shift the transmission into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L Low if necessary Do not shift to a lower gear than necessary to maintain headway Over revving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost If you start to slow to a stop try turning your steering wheel no more than a 1 4 turn quickly back and forth while still applying throttle This will allow the tires to get a fresh bite and help maintain your momen tum ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 CAUTION On icy or slippery roads do not downshift at high engine RPM or vehicle speeds because engine brak ing may cause skidding and loss of control Mud Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires and is very difficult to get through You should use second gear manual transmission or DRIVE automatic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position to maintain your momentum If you start to slow to a stop try
133. NDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera
134. NT PANEL 297 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF MEDIA CENTER 130 RES RSC AM FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER MP3 AUX JACK AND SIRIUS RADIO NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of the radio faceplate TUNE SCROLL Q RES 042305233 RES RSC Radio 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 3
135. OFF switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESP Off 4H Range Only This mode is intended for off highway or off road use when ESP stability features could inhibit vehicle maneu verability due to trail conditions This mode is entered by pressing and holding the ESP OFF switch for five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is running In this mode all ESP and TCS stability features are turned off except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section After five seconds a chime will sound the ESP TCS Indicator Light will illuminate and the ESP OFF message will appear in the odometer Refer to 380 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING With the ESP switched off the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP and ERM are unavailable In Compass and Mini Trip Computer If Equipped in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation To turn ESP on again momentarily press the ESP OFF switch This will restore the normal ESP On mode of operation NOTE e The ESP system will change to Partial Off mode if the vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph 64 km h After the vehicle speed is reduced below 35 mph 56 km h the ESP system will return to Full Off mode e The ESP OFF message will display and the audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed in the PARK position from any position other than PARK and then moved out of the PARK position
136. OUR VEHICLE ie e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the Uconnect phone and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit Uconnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit e You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit e Next choose the number designation home work cellular or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook
137. RSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the
138. S Chrysler Group LLC AR 10JK72 126 AB 2nd Edition Printed in U S A
139. SE O Info Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play S heehee ea oe en 4 eee ee eae ven Ge 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M lll Media Center 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM Stereo Radio And CD DVD HDD NAV If Equipped 4 spe dar dre e ce O Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped D Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped D Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio O Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio ll Media Center 130 RES AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play o Notes On Playing MP3 Files O Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode ll Media Center 130 RES RSC AM FM Stereo Radio With CD Player MP3 AUX Jack And Sirius Radio O Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD And MP3 Audio Play D Notes On Playing MP3 Files O List Button CD Mode For MP3 Play O Info Button CD Mode For MP3 Play ll Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Radio If Equipped REN REQ RER RES REU RBZ Radios Only pres quere y E 9 b eee oe O System Activation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 D Electronic Serial Number Sirius WE CD DVD Disc Maintenance 314 pee Pra ERENCE Oia S quide d ll Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 315 J A n Mundi MA MD
140. TE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes 526 e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC vehicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshooting and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles Included are starting operating emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSIST
141. THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the EvR button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The Uconnect Phone will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for roaming network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with
142. TING FAM WIMDEIW LOCH THROTTLE LOWER AIR GUTLET CONTROL E DOTA BaD ah i BATTERY HEATED HEROS ae bigs pan e SEAT BELT BLIDING DOOR hii NR CONDITIONING HE ia RECOONITION CHAPSI PG RELEASE DUTTON S7 5 WO 9 D E yo FN DAER ANCHORS LOW PLI POWER WIMDAHIELO WIPER SE ARBAU SLID DOOR EMERGENCT LIGHTER AND TEINER FOR UCDAMNECT STEERING FLUID AD WASHER RELEASE HANDLE CHLORE TEH BUTTON SRS a CY B E ameas AND a ERR odii i Ii a MALFUNCTKEIN TRAE EMONE COOLANT SUFFLEMENTAL PAZERHGBE Doom AJAR CONVERTITILE SEE COWHER INDICATOR LET Cl TEMP TEMPERATURE RESTRANT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF TO DOWN NP UR MANUAL GeO HILL DESCEMT COMTROL AWD Apu M MARE o INTRODUCTION 7 ESP S ELECTRONIC STABILITY ELECTRONIC PROGRAM DRAKE SPFFDCONTEQL ASSIST SYSTEM ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTH OCK ORE 4WD FOUR WHEEL DRIVE A AFLP A HAZARD A C PUSH AIH CONDITIONER BRAKING SYSTEM BRAKE BRAXE ETETEM WARMING PARKING BRAKE TOW HAUL Tawi FHA 4 LOW AR WHEEL Denn LOW OFF ELECTRONIC m mi ABNLITY CONTR GF 010507683 8 INTRODUCTION M WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and C
143. TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display win
144. This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How to Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Disconnect the combination lap shoulder belt from the buckle and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensi tive emergency locking mode Seat Belt Pretensioners If Equipped The seat belts for both front seating positions may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the airbags the pretension ers are single use items After a collision deploys the airbags and or pretensioners a deployed airbag and or pretensioner must be replaced immediately Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the BeltAlert will alert the driver to buckle the seat belt The driver should also instruct all oth
145. UR VEHICLE 495 Rear Tail Stop Turn Signal and Backup Lamp 3 Rotate the appropriate socket 1 4 turn counterclock i Jl ise th it from the housing 1 Remove the two inboard screws attaching the tail light V756 HOEN TEMOVE 1t IOM te CIUS housing to the body DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace a aes Center High Mounted Stop Lamp CHMSL The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that extends upward from the tailgate behind the spare tire If service is needed obtain the LED Cover Assembly from your local authorized dealer 1 Remove the spare tire 2 Remove the four screws holding the lens cover in place on the spare tire carrier 3 Disconnect the wire harness from the back of the LED cover 2 Separate the housing from the body by pushing the lamp inboard while pulling the lamp away from the body 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUID CAPACITIES 70 Liters 85 Liters oo 5 7 Liters Cooling System s G O 3 8 Liter Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 5 13 Quarts 12 Liters Year 100 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level EE MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engi
146. VR button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select e The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Cellular Phones e Press the amp button to begin 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE i e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the amp vR button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Ave button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the vr button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
147. WARNING form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC dealership or qualified repair center have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued e Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air condi tioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle s engine the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warme
148. When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h STARTING AND OPERATING 399 Life of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e lire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to 055007576 1 Worn Tire follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure 2 New lre You could lose control and have an accident resulting These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread in serious injury or death grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the Keep unmounted tires in a cool dry place with as little tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline 400 STARTING AND OPERATING M Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed see the paragraph on tread wear indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa tion placard for the size designation of your
149. YOUR VEHICLE ME O Using The Panic Alam uae sua RES 21 o To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 21 O Programming Additional Transmitters 22 O General Information 22 O Transmitter Battery Replacement 29 ll Remote Starting System If Equipped 24 HU How To Use Remote Start 23 seme eui 24 00 RM PP TETTE 26 O Upper Half Door Window Removal Eg pped ucxaduopacse yo E RR ots RA ES 26 D Upper Half Door Window Installation IEBGUISPEC au au oe den Qd e Ren eS 27 EPront Door Removal use Re ER iis 27 D Rear Door Removal Four Door Models 28 NM Door LOk ioo a IRSE ERETEPESESIS 30 o Manual Door Locks 2455222993422 8 30 D Power Door Locks If Equipped 31 O Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit 32 O Automatic Door Locks 33 M Windows xs se RP ae 34 D Power Windows If Equipped 34 O Rear Power Windows Four Door Models dui D DD Wind Buffeting 245445 99 xd ERROR ris 36 la Rear Swing Gate 0 0 004 36 W Occupant Restraints 0005 37 ALap oh ulder DEUS spee se aaia y e de des py es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 O Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lockout Four Door Models Only o Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage O Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions o Automatic Locking Retractors ALR Mode If Equipped O Seat B
150. a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 WMA files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times If a disc contains multi formats such as CD audio and MP3 WMA tracks the radio will only play the MP3 WMA tracks on that disc Supported MP3 WMA File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 WMA extension as MP3 WMA files Non MP3 WMA files named with the MP3 WMA extension may cause play back problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 WMA and will not play the file When using the MP3 WMA encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 WMA file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 WMA files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 MPEG Sampling E TIMDII 320 256 224 192 160 128 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 160 128 144 112 96 80 64 drin a 24 22 05 16 y 56 48 Sampling Bit Rate kbps eit Fr
151. actors such as road conditions leaving the road way or striking objects or other vehicles NOTE Anytime the ESP system is in the Full Off mode ERM is disabled Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program for a complete explanation of the available ESP modes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 WARNING Many factors such as vehicle loading road condi tions and driving conditions influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers especially those that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent acci dents The capabilities of an ERM equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Program ESP This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions The ESP corrects for over under steering of the vehicle by apply ing the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESP applies the brake of t
152. ag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor mance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler Group LLC such investigations may be re quested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insur ance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler Group LLC regardless of initiative the com pany or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the electronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity upon request General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases such
153. ain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor quality fuel etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 When the engine is running the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and drivability If the MIL is flashing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M WARNINCG A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants or wood or cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occu pants or others 26 Electronic Stability Control ESC Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Malfunction Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active
154. aint pull up on the head restraint 030907562 Adjustable Head Restraints Removing Head Restraint NOTE The rear head restraints are not adjustable 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To install the head restraint insert the head restraint rods Fold and Tumble Rear Seat Two Door Models into each guide apply pressure down on the headrest i NOTE until the head restraint reaches the first lock position e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to push the large button in and push down and adjust head a reposition the front seats restraint to desired position e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING 1 Lift the seatback release lever and fold the seatback forward NOTE Ensure that the front of the head restraint is facing toward the front of the vehicle Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision The head restraints should always be checked prior to operating the vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion Always adjust the head restraints when the vehicle is in PARK ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 DET Rear Seat Release Folding Rear Seat 2 Slowly flip the entire seat forward 3 Return the seat to the normal position 4 Raise the rear seatback usi
155. ake linings replace if necessary Inspect exhaust system Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the CV joints Perform the first inspection at 12 000 miles 20 000 km or 12 months Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 504 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 18 000 Miles 30 000 km or 24 000 Miles 40 000 km or 24 Months Maintenance Service 18 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter E 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary 1 Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet Inspect the CV joints off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A l N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dea
156. always reinstall the valve stem cap This will reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in NOTE the tire e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care Base System and maintenance nor to provide warning of a tire The Tire Pressure Monitor System IPMS uses wireless failure or condition technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to e The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge Monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each while adjusting your tire pressure wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure EE l readings to the Receiver Module e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure NOTE Itis particularly important for you to check the Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and the proper pressure stopping ability ee STARTING AND OPERATING 405 The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Lig
157. and lubricate body compo nents more often than in normal service to prevent excessive wear Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 e Salt in the air near sea coast localities e Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint e Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Gets Washing CAUTION e Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve
158. arrows This feature operates in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob wit
159. arts and cares about your satisfaction ROLLOVER WARNING Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars It is capable of performing better in a wide variety of off road applications Driven in an unsafe manner all vehicles can go out of control Because of the higher center of gravity and the narrower track if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over when some other vehicles may not 6 INTRODUCTION Do not attempt sharp turns abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident rollover of the vehicle and severe or fatal sin A Drive A MISE EN GARDE ves AVEC DES SACS GONFLABLES FERFECTIONN S LEE ATS PEUVENT Te TU I DU GRAVEMENT BIER S R FAIN IM i Sac cmELR ILE LA LTD AG EET LA PLACE LU FLUS B ee rites LES LRRLNTL Wi MALE PLLCERU EDGE POUR LN FR KT OGREN T VERS LANE BE Cof NT D V HICULL Ci EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIRBAGS CHELDSEN BLED CA HAAT eS Tt Ti as THE Ge SEAT B THE A PLETE FON CL WE PUT EELRLFACING CSULD RAT IM THE eT ONE USE LELTILLTS AND GALO TS BEE CHCHLE b iiA MUML FCR AWE C NECREUBLTIC ABOUT p re PRCA UTRA LES COHTUERER DE EE OUEET E11 ES STET LAN RE Di FRTESUE POUS ESAT DONEATLR LE GUIDE GA LEL COOL POUR CTLRER PLUS Bi
160. as 4 wheel drive operation e g snow plowing off road operation If this HOT OIL message turns on stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with the transmission in NEU TRAL until the message turns off CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture HOTOIL Warning message illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure WARNING Continued operation with the Transmission Tem perature HOTOIL Warning message illuminated could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components causing a fire that may result in personal injury 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will display in the odometer display area Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started noFUSE If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the Ignition Off Draw IOD fuse is improperly installed or damaged a noFUSE message will display in the odom eter display area For further information on fuses and fuse locations refer to Fuses in Maintaining Your Vehicle CHAngE OIL Message Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator syst
161. ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the Uconnect Phonebook e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available e To call one of the names in the list press the m button during the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The Uconnect Phone will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the Uconnect Phone
162. atally injured Do not leave the key in Power Door Lack Switch the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle WARNING e For personal security reasons and safety in an Power Door Locks If Equipped The door lock switch is located on each front door panel Press the switch downward to lock the doors and upward to unlock the doors Continued accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows 1 Close all doors and plac
163. ated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the vr button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the EvR button and say 37 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect Phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the AVR button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations This is normal ee UNDERSTANDING
164. autions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel pad visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle Save this label for a convenient record of your vehicle identification number and optional equipment NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Word About Your Keys 12 O Ignition Key Removal x ker e n 12 HKey In lem on Reminder 5 re 13 ll Steering Wheel Lock 0 13 o To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel 13 o To Release The Steering Wheel Lock 14 Monty Key llblsideddersuees ed dnos secs 14 A Replacement IKGyS usan cues Rob xU 15 O Customer Key Programming 16 O General Information ll Vehicle Security Alarm If Equipped O Rearming The System D To Set The Alarm o To Disarm The System H illuminated Entry ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE If Equipped o To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate H To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING
165. bags alone could lead to more The airbag system consists of the following severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all e Airbag Warning Light Always wear your seat belts even though you have e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC airbags e Driver Front Airbag Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument e Front Passenger Airbag panel during airbag deployment could cause seri ous injury including death Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags If Equipped Steering Wheel and Column e nstrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls Occupant Restraint Control ORC Module The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side airbags is required in a frontal or side collision Based on the impact sensors signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags side airbags if equipped and front seat belt pretensioners if equipped as required depending on each type of impact Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provid
166. bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 simultaneously If this occurs the Electronic Speed Con trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the Elec tronic Speed Control system off push the ON OFF button a second time The cruise indicator light will turn off The Electronic Speed Control system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when you are not using it To Set a Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the se
167. behind the header and lift the top folding it toward the rear of the vehicle 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 16 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between the Raising the Soft Top bows and as far inward as possible This will keep any fl Once ereaeye the sunaicor totheside portion of the top from flappi g 2 Install door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 3 Make sure the plastic sleeve is slid over Sunrider link Sunrider Models only 17 Close the front header latches 18 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 035907428 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 4 Standing on the side of the vehicle lift the top by the 5 Make sure the Sunrider bracket on the side bows side bow and the 2 bow middle bow up and over the latches to the door rails Sunrider Models only sports bar until the header rests on the top of the windshield frame 035907427 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Open the header latches and engage the hook on each 7 If the swing gate brackets were removed install them side onto the windshield loops do not close the latches by hooking the rear edge of the bracket on the interior g side of the body channel Then rotate it rearward and over the channel until it snaps onto the exterior part of the rail To b
168. c 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M e Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false com pass readings Automatic Compass Calibration The self calibrating feature of the compass eliminates the need to calibrate the compass for normal conditions During a short initial period the compass may appear erratic and the CAL symbol will appear blinking on the display After the vehicle has completed at least one complete circle under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects calibration will be complete when the CAL symbol is extinguished After initial calibration the compass will continue to automatically update this calibration whenever the ve hicle is in motion Manual Compass Calibration NOTE Before attempting a manual compass calibra tion the engine must be running and the transmission in the PARK position if equipped If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 First enter the variance mode Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approxi mately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR Compass Varia
169. ce Every surface has a different effect on STARTING AND OPERATING 353 your vehicle s steering handling and traction Control ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off road driving so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a good driving posture Avoid sudden accelerations turns or braking In most cases there are no road signs posted speed limits or signal lights Therefore you will need to use your own good judgment on what is safe and what is not When on a trail you should always be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in terrain The key is to plan your future driving route while remembering what you are currently driving over CAUTION Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other combustible materials The heat from your vehicle exhaust system could cause a fire 354 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down cargo Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an off road situation When to Use 4L Low Range When off road driving shift into 4L Low for additional traction and control on slippery or difficult terrain ascending or descending steep hills and to increase low speed pulling power This range should be limited to extreme situations such as deep snow mud steep in clines or sand where additional low speed pulling power is needed Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph 40 km h should be avoided when in 4L
170. ce taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 132 000 Miles 220 000 km or 132 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary I Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary I Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 516 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 138 000 Miles 230 000 km or 144 000 Miles 240 000 km or 144 Months Maintenance Service 138 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil Rotate tires filter If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the J Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals repla
171. ce if necessary M A l N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 517 150 000 Miles 250 000 km or 150 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the transfer case fluid M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer lE 518 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx t This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer NB to the owner but is not required to maintain emissions warranty WARNING e You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle
172. ce provider or the phone manufacturer for details The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Pl
173. ce the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Change the automatic transmission fluid and main sump filter if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 509 66 000 Miles 110 000 km or 66 Months Maintenance 72 000 Miles 120 000 km or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil a
174. ch pedal on a manual transmission ee STARTING AND OPERATING 433 3 Shift the transfer case lever into the desired position CAUTION 4 Start the engine e Do not use a bumper mounted clamp on tow bar 5 Shift the automatic transmission into DRIVE or release on your vehicle The bumper face bar will be the clutch on manual transmissions damaged NOTE When shifting out of transfer case N Neutral on automatic transmission equipped vehicles turning the engine off may be required to avoid gear clash WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS W Hazard Warning Flasher 436 B8 If Your Engine Overheats 436 W Jacking And Tire Changing 438 Alack Location 2 599 2 E 8OR Erb ALORS 438 O Spare Tir 5lOWdBE 4 sodes amb s Ade ER RT ES 439 O Preparations Por Jacking vs Rs 439 3 Jacking Instructions E jump Starting Procedures O Preparations For Jump Start o Jump Starting Procedure ll Emergency Tow Hooks If Equipped Bl Towing A Disabled Vehicle 436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M HAZARD WARNING FLASHER The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls A flasher When the switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flasher Press the switch to turn on the Haza
175. ch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm in the rear seat Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch WARNING plate into the buckle until you hear a click d s A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that the strongest bones will take the force in a collision Continued 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued e A shoulder belt placed behind will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder be
176. change Replace as required CAUTION The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con WARNING verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst materials that can burn Such materials might be damage grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust caution system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas CAUTION where your exhaust system can contact anything that Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your can burn vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued opera
177. ches and hooks from the loops assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft on the windshield frame top If zippers are difficult to operate due to road dust etc clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush Cleaning products are available through your authorized dealer 1 If your vehicle has half doors remove each half door window by opening the door and lifting the half door window out NOTE Stow half door windows carefully outside of the vehicle never inside to avoid scratches 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side TUN ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213 4 Open the swing gate 5 Before unzipping the rear window release the first 3 in 7 6 cm of both sail panels from the channel Remove the swing gate bar by pulling it straight rearward out of the swing gate brackets 81b34aa7 e Unzip the rear window starting at the right lower corner of the window Pull the zipper up across the top and down to the left lower corner Zipper pulls will stay on the rear window Pull down on the rear window to disengage it from the zipper on the top cover Stow the windows carefully to avoid scratch ing 214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 6 Undo the Velcro that runs along the top and rear 9 Finish releasing the sail panel retainers from the body edge of the side window side channel at the rear corners of the vehicle 7 Beginning from the rear lower c
178. cle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable and cause an accident It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 6 Remove the lug nuts and wheel 7 Position the spare wheel tire on the vehicle and install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered 8 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left and remove the jack and wheel blocks 9 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening for increased leverage Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice The correct wheel nut tightness is 95 ft lbs 130 N m If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station 10 Remove the jack assembly and wheel blocks WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 11 Secure the tire jack and tools in their proper locations en WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 443 JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in When temperatures a
179. cle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improp erly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the odometer Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the prob lem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration I v nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently For states that require an Inspection and Ma
180. conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure heat the mode control to floor and the blower control cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack Location The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear storage compartment Refer to Storage in Understanding the e Getting under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never get any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Storage a WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 439 Spare Tire Stowage 2 Set the parking brake T th tire from th i the ti TP O REMOVE we spare UTE IOM Me Cannel TEMOVE te Ate 3 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK or a cover if equipped and remove the
181. d pulling the fabric to the rear 206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Release Sunrider latch both sides 81927228 NOTE Ensure the fabric does not overhang the sides of 5 Open the swing gate and lower the top the vehicle ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207 Quick Steps for Raising the Soft Top 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation 81927762 ANNUM RIEN 208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Install rear corner panels 3 Rotate the header forward 036007402 036107424 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209 4 Engage the header latches 5 Install the side and back windows 036007407 81925914 210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Down The Soft Top 036007423 1 Header Bow 6 Body Side Retainer 2 2 Bow 7 Quarter Window 3 3 Bow 8 Check Strap 4 4 Bow 9 Front Retainer Quarter Window 5 Sail Panel 10 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211 En y Dd 1 Zipper Start 2 Zipper F ish 3 Swing Gate Bar Inis 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE Clean side and rear windows before removal to 3 Release the header lat
182. d with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely Parking Brake When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is ap plied It does not show the degree of brake application When par
183. d also be checked at this time Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 WARNING Continued e The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil and Refrigerants Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency EPA and is an ozone saving product However the manufacturer recommends that air condi tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure quiet easy operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and erit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure
184. d down or removed from the ve hicle e The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door Models To provide additional storage area each rear seat can be Release Bar Location folded flat to allow for extended cargo space and still maintain some rear seating room 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE To Fold Down the Rear Seat e Prior to folding the rear seat it may be necessary to Locate the pull strap lower outboard side of seat and reposition the front seat to its mid track position pull it toward you until the seatback releases e Be sure that the front seats are fully upright and positioned forward This will allow the rear seat to fold down easily WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Pull Strap Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 To Raise the Rear Seat Raise the seatback and lock it into place If interference from the cargo area prevents the seatback from fully locking you will have difficulty returning the seat to it
185. d is found under the hood bundled in front of the battery tray ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 WARNING Remember to disconnect the cord before driving CAUTION Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch Damage to the 110 115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause electrocution pedal or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged as this will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Use the heater when temperatures below 0 F 18 C are expected to last for several days NOTE During cold weather you may experience in creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid MANUAL TRANSMISSION IF EQUIPPED warms up This is normal WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline 334 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx ee 1 3 5 2 4 6 R 81cd6226 Shift Pattern Shifting Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly press the accelerator pedal You should always use 1st gear when starting from a standing position if under heavy load or when pulling a trailer Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed chart S
186. d may plug the radiator 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When adding engine coolant antifreeze e The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent engine coolant antifreeze changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant reserve tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 WARNING The warning words DO NOT OPEN
187. d the amp button until you hear a single beep 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the VR button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the amp button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the Xe button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the amp button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and
188. d under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH compatible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren Your vehicle s rear seat is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle s seat belts instead securing the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle structure 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M LATCH compatible child restraint systems are now avail able However because the lower anchorages are to be introduced over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to also have features for installation using the vehicle
189. d up engine is shut off or before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick Adding 1 U S Quart 0 95L of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines CAUTION Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure This could damage your engine eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection for all engines under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer tified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can da
190. dance with local laws 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WINDOWS Power Windows If Equipped The power window switches are located on the instru ment panel center stack below the radio The top left switch controls the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger window four door models and the lower right switch controls the right rear passenger window four door models The switches will continue to function for up to two minutes after the ignition key has been removed or until a front door is opened Power Window Switches Window Lockout Switch Four Door Models Only The window lockout switch located between the win dow switches allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located on the back of the center floor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 console To disable the window controls press the win dow lockout button downward To enable the window controls press the window lockout button upward Auto Down Both the driver and front passenger window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically Io cancel the Auto Down move ment operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto Down operation pull
191. ded down all times when the windshield is down Be sure that you carefully follow the instructions for raising the windshield Make sure that the folding windshield windshield wipers side bars and all associated hardware and fasteners are correctly and tightly assembled before driving your vehicle Failure to follow these instructions may prevent your vehicle from providing you and your passengers protection in some accidents If you remove the doors store them outside the vehicle In the event of an accident a loose door may cause personal injury Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the doors If you choose to remove the doors see your authorized dealer for a replacement cowl mounted outside mirror Federal law requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on road use WARNING Carefully follow these warnings to help protect against personal injury e Do not drive your vehicle on road with the wind shield down Continued 236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Lowering the Windshield and Removing Side Bars 1 Lower the fabric top or remove the hard top following the instructions in this manual NOTE To assist in properly reinstalling side bars mark the original locations prior to removing 2 Remove the two top hex bolts 13 mm and the one side hex bolt 13 mm visible through the trim Do not remove plastic corner trim sun visor bolts or sport bar covering 819292b7 3 Remov
192. dge fuses mini fuses and relays A label s Rm a e Cavity Cartridge Mini Description that identifies each component is printed on the inside of Fuse Fuse ine cover NNNM eee p mM Transfer Case Module Bo p 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse JA 25 Amp Driver Door Node J13 60 Amp Ignition Off Draw Natural Yellow IOD Main Jo 25 Amp Passenger Door Node J14 40 Amp EBL Rear Window De Natural Green J6 40 Amp Anti Lock Brake System 15 30 Amp Green ABS Pump Feed ESP Pink fogger J7 30 Amp Anti Lock Brake System Pink ABS Valve Feed ESP Rear Blower Starter Solenoid Front Wiper LO HI Front Rear Washer J10 30 Amp Headlamp Wash Relay J19 60 Amp Pink Manifold Tuning Valve Yellow J11 30 Amp Sway Bar Pink Powertrain Control J9 40 Amp PZEV Sec Motor Feed Module PCM Trans Green Flex Fuel Range MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse Fuse Fuse Spare ae 20 Amp Rear Heated Seat If 15 Amp Center High Mounted Yellow __ Equipped Blue Stop Light CHMSL Ignition Off Draw Ve Switch Stop Lamp Feed hicle Entertainment Sys 20 Amp Relay Trailer Lighting tem IOD VES Satellite Yellow Stop Digital Audio Receiver 2 0 Amp Frt Rear Axle Locker SDARS DVD Hands Yellow Rela Free Module HFM RADIO Antenna Ee
193. dio faceplate Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display ESN SID Access With REU Radio While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the radio faceplate ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 Next turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center of the radio to scroll to Subscription and then press and release the joystick All of the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display Selecting Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna if equipped Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger lug gage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception e P
194. dow Each button can be set for SET 1 and 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play w
195. dual top wrap 7 Put up the soft top Refer to Soft Top Putting Up the Soft Top in this section 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee ne HARD TOP IF EQUIPPED SEPA Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior CAUTION water damage stains or mildew e The hard top is not designed to carry any addi e It is recommended that the top be free of water tional loads such as roof racks spare tires build prior to panel removal Removing the top opening ing hunting or camping supplies and or luggage a door or lowering a window while the top is wet etc Also it was not designed as a structural may allow water to drip into the vehicles interior The hard top assembly must be positioned prop member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any additional loads other than environmen tal rain snow etc Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame and bodyside or fully removed erly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior Careless handling and storage of the removable roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicles interior The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicles interior E UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 Front Panel s Removal NOTE Left panel mu
196. e pressure after a vehicle has not been driven for more than three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period Refer to Tires General Informa tion in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning threshold for any reason including low temperature effects or natural pressure loss through the tire The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended ee STARTING AND OPERATING 403 cold placard pressure Once the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light has been illuminated the tire pressure must be increased to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be turned OFF The system will auto matically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours air pressure of 3
197. e 141 Tip OME Pm 330 Tire and Loading Information Placard 390 391 Tire Identification Number TIN 388 TUAE S a ex pere mre 6c kee 308 ICA RR RE Bd 385 Tire Safety Information 452 7 RR P3 385 D V 78 394 527 APOSTO ipu gees Pha ots baw E d ERE 395 CHaNCINe oux sos dre pees E eee aS Pe T PP 438 General Information 3 css ws 4045 eu eho Eee 394 PUORO OU uo def ones ee ERE PES 397 544 INDEX M Inflation Pressures 2 04 on Gesu ence Gs eens 395 JOCKS 6 2 438 441 Load Capaciiy 23 929959 4 P445 5 oe 990 991 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 402 Pressure Warning Light 5x3 aris cet a eee 254 Quality Gradh siangineeehed coer dus v2 527 RA eere eeren ee eee ee Bae 398 Replacement 4466005845442 qe hee e Ee 400 ROUE sey estu wey sarod ue eS qe Pa s PS 401 DAC A 2ok 5a 385 n AR 402 54 f Ps eoes ee shee en ae et ee 386 DDAIG LH 2 44a eee ee seks eae eee aes 439 DPN aw poe o ates eee ee ca ae Bo eS 398 Tread Wear Indicators 424a ted 5954 6 398 10 Open Hood 644 tenner een eea ew RR 131 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 422 Torque Converter Clutch iss Xa eek ipe 343 Tow Hooks Emergency 44 2144444446644 RES 447 TOWNS 6 4544 ae A RE oes ee a ee 416 447 24 Hour Towing Assistance 101 Disabled Vehieler 4 4 40 4 p45 GG bee EHE SR 447 SUIS Gad a Gee ee aes aoe a oe oe ee 420 Recreational MM 430 nu pr m 420 TOWING ASSISIANCe e erripa ard 306
198. e System function 3 0 STARTING AND OPERATING xe WARNING WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others e Pumping of the Anti Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the CAUTION The Anti Lock Brake System is subject to possible detrimental effects of electronic interference caused by improperly installed aftermarket radios or tele phones vehicle nor can they increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents NOTE During severe braking conditions a pulsing sensation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard This is normal indicating that the Anti Lock Brake System is functioning Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control s
199. e addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Airbags are not ex pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage for example some pole collisions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions Side airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all crashes and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating airbag 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the airbags to The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions If the key is in the LOCK position in the ACC po
200. e injured by these fumes Keep the flip up window closed when you are oper ating the vehicle OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems e Three point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and all passengers THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Side Seat Airbags if equipped 2 An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event if equipped All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat if equipped 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation ba
201. e light Grasp the folded side bows and slide the top fie along the door frame track to the rear door frame ge 181927 18 Tuck the fabric and the check straps between ifie E VeSSUENSES ee bows as far inside as possible This will keep any portion 17 arn ee the side bows off the door frame tack of the top from flapping outside of the vehicle and lower the top down into the vehicle eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219 19 Once the top is fully down use the Velcro straps 20 Close the front header latches provided to secure the top to the vehicle by wrapping the strap around the side bows and through the slot on the body 21 Remove the door frames if desired Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information Putting Up The Soft Top NOTE Be extremely careful when putting up the soft 3 top to prevent the doors from getting scratched It may be helpful to open the rear doors 1 Install the door frames if removed Refer to Door Frame in this section for further information 2 Undo the straps used to secure the top in the down position and store in secure location 3 Open the swing gate 220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Grasp the folded side bows and lift to the top of the 5 Insert the slider feature of the knuckles into the door rear door frames frame tracks and slide the top forward NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera tion ee
202. e properly located the bracket must only be clipped to the shortened rail edge eee RCRD Tee eT ACERT er c eon ETE os CD eem ata ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 8 Move to the rear of the vehicle and gently pull the sail 9 Partially install the sail panel retainers into the body panels over the rear roof bow side channel leaving the last 3 in 7 6 cm toward the rear window loose on both sides Pulling down on the rear roof bow 3 bow will aid to reach the channel with the retainers T 819261831 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 10 To install the side windows affix the window tem 11 Insert the front retainer of the window into the door porarily by attaching to the Velcro in the rear corner channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so 2 can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the CUT a window UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 1 Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion 12 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEH
203. e speedometer and odometer read ings TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering handling and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and develop irregular wear patterns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On Off Road type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to main tain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to Maintenance Schedule for the proper mainte nance intervals More frequent rotation is permissible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed 402 STARTING AND OPERATING The suggested rotation method is the forward cross shown in the following diagram E T LE 055703771 Tire Rotation TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 6 9 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tir
204. e system serviced by an hor ler j te Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged authorized dealer immediately before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 369 ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM The Anti Lock Brake System ABS is designed to aid the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system operates with a separate computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer WARNING Significant over or under inflation of tires or mixing sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss of braking effectiveness The Anti Lock Brake System conducts a low speed self test at about 12 mph 20 km h If for any reason your foot is on the brake when the vehicle reaches 12 mph 20 km h this check will be delayed until 25 mph 40 km h The Anti Lock Brake System pump motor runs during the self test and during an ABS stop to provide the regulated hydraulic pressure The motor pump makes a low humming noise during operation this is normal During off road use loss of traction can temporarily defeat the system and cause the warning light to illumi nate Turn the ignition to LOCK and ON again to restore Anti Lock Brak
205. e that may cause undesired operation VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation s This Voice Command system allows you to i VR control your AM FM radio satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command EvR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command VR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command EvR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE Atany time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Me
206. e the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Automatic Door Locks Programming feature in accordance with local laws The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled as follows Automatic Door Locks The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition I door locks if all of the following conditions are met 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and 1 The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK des osition The transmission is in gear P All doorsate closed 3 Press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 2 3 4 The throttle is pressed 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming a HIC a a ASSURDHH IE 0 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power its previous setting door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE NOTE Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in transmitter accor
207. e the sun visor 4 Remove the A pillar cap 5 Disconnect microphone if equipped with uconnect phone 6 Open the sport bar Velcro covering ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237 CAUTION 7 Remove the one hex bolt 13 mm visible through the plastic trim on the bottom side of the side bar one hex bolt 13 mm on the side of the side bar and one hex bolt Do not remove the head impact foam from the side 13 mm on top of the side bar bars as damage to the foam may result NOTE Pull side bar out nan ad oe NOTE Store all of the mounting bolts in their original threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping 8 Remove the side bar assembly and reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 9 To safely store the side bars in your vehicle use four cinch straps available from your authorized dealer Attach the straps through the slots located on the floor behind the folded rear seat at the front of the storage bin cover 238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNINCG You or others could be injured if you carry the side bars loose in your vehicle Remove the side bars from the vehicle or securely store them as described or they may cause personal injury if an accident occurs See your authorized dealer for the cinch straps 10 Remove the windshield wiper arms by first pulling the wiper away from the windshield and out to the lock position Unsnap the wiper arm nut caps and r
208. e to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models CAUTION To maintain the appearance of your vehicle s interior trim and top follow these precautions e Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with the top down as exposure to sun or rain may damage interior trim e Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching agents on top material as damage may result e Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down and dry on the paint leaving a streak e After cleaning your vehicle s fabric top always make sure it is completely dry before lowering ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 e Be especially careful when washing the windows by CAUTION Continued following the directions for Care of Fabric Top Windows e Avoid high pressure car washes as they can dam age the top material Also increased water pres WASHING Use MOPAR Car Wash or equivalent or sure may force past the weather strips mild soap suds lukewarm water and a brush with soft bristles If extra cleaning is required use MOPAR Con vertible Cloth Top Cleaner or equivalent or a mild foaming cleaner on the entire top but support the top from underneath It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Use care whe
209. ease remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle simply press the amp button and follow the audible prompts for directions All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone to a Cellular Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions Press the amp button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted after the b
210. eased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph 120 km h 398 STARTING AND OPERATING M Radial Ply Tires WARNING WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed poorly The instability could cause an accident AI ways use radial tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your authorized dealer for radial tire repairs Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be Tire Spinning replaced
211. eat belt or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Older Children and Child Restraints Children who weigh more than 20 lbs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system Refer to LATCH Child Seat Anchorage System The belt positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child cannot sit 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt Children Too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat e Make sure that the child is upright
212. ec tion can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Recent R Towing gency English p Uconnect Francais Last See Enter Enter Number See Setup Read Send Phonebook Name Number on Phone Flowchart Messages Messages Flowchart is redialed The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Number associated Number with entry is Dialed is dialed Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030607515 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Voice Tree Phonebook Phonsbosic Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed SHE Enter Name 1st Confirmation at a time Enter L ocation Enter Location Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Current Number Enter Number is played Enter New New Entry Added Rarer Entry is modified Phonebook Cleared Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf80 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup Confirmation Select Audio SMS Incoming Prompts Devices
213. ection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 WMA player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function eee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Voice Command System No function If Equipped EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand
214. ed The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays INSERT DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Eject Button Ejecting Compact Disc s Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton My with the corresponding number 1 6 where the A CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF SEEK Button CD MODE Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in CD and MP3 MWA modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 SCAN Button CD MODE Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing TIME Button CD MODE
215. ed in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position N Neutral Position This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain It is to be used for flat towing behind another vehicle Refer to Recreational Towing in Start ing and Operating for further information 4L Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same 346 STARTING AND OPERATING ee speed This range 4L provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose slippery road surfaces only Do not exceed 25 mph 40 km h The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4L position Shifting Procedure 2H to 4H or 4H to 2H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion If the vehicle is in motion shifts can be made up to 50 mph 80 km h With the vehicle in motion the transfer case will engage disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera tor pedal after completing the shift Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever 4H to 4L or 4L to 4H With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift an automatic transmission into NEUTRAL N or press the clutch pedal on a manual transmission While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h shift the trans
216. ed off road Do not use tow hooks for EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks they are mounted in the front and the rear NOTE For off road recovery it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle WARNINCG e Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck vehicle chains may break causing serious injury or death e Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks Tow straps and chains may break causing serious injury tow truck hookup or highway towing You could damage your vehicle Tow straps are recommended when towing the vehicle chains may cause vehicle damage TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed CAUTION Towing this vehicle using any other method could result in extensive damage to the transfer case and or transmission Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E Engine Compartment 3 8L 451 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD H 452 oO Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 452 ll Emissions Inspection And Maintenance FOC 5 2 2434 o4 oh rad au EE Po Bea d 453 W Replacement Parts 454 W Dealer Service 02 eee 454 Bl Maintenance Procedures 455 APODO O fase nee e sh d eae oa
217. ed to take the abuse Always look ahead and make every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires CAUTION e Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large enough to strike your axles or undercarriage e Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large enough to contact the door sills Crossing a Ravine Gully Ditch Washout or Rut When crossing a ravine gully ditch washout or a large rut the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle s mobility Approach these obstacles at a 45 degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle independently You need to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover If you get caught in a rut dig a small trench to the right or left at a 45 degree angle ahead of the front tires Use the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created You should now be able to drive out following the trench you just created at a 45 degree angle WARNING There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing an obstacle at any angle with steep sides Crossing Logs To cross a log approach it at a slight angle approxi mately 10 to 15 degrees This allows one front tire to be 358 STARTING AND OPERATING M on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the log While climbing the log modulate your brake a
218. eep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect Phone The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which cellular phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial by Saying a Number e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 e The system will prompt you to say the number you want
219. elt Pretensioners If Equipped O Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlert O Seat Belts And Pregnant Women O Seat Belt Extender 208 D Supplemental Restraint Systems SRS AUDI MC m 50 HChid Restraint v 24 2442 44 0c4 e02 84844 62 W Engine Break In Recommendations 75 aM Galen Tips 22x22 POSEE kde E 75 O Transporting Passengers 2114 4 avse dr oan D BNE XHaUGt eas PT 76 O Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The on Pm 77 O Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle auae soo Rx e ads 78 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The keys for your new vehicle are enclosed in a plastic bag with the key code number on it If you received your keys without the bag ask your authorized dealer to give you the number The key code can also be obtained by your authorized dealer from your vehicle invoice Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transmission If Equipped 1 Place the shift lever in the PARK position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY position 020205845 Ignition Switch Positions 1 LOCK 3 ON 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START 3 Push the ignition key inward 4 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the Key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Manual Transmission If Equipped 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC ACCESSORY p
220. em The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance refer to the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure 25 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is a part of C an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Cert
221. em VES Guide CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Iry a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heater Only The controls for the heatin
222. emove the retaining nuts Lift the wiper arms off and store them in the center console or securely behind the rear seat NOTE It may be necessary to use a battery terminal puller tool in order to separate the wiper arms from the shaft after the nuts have been removed 11 Remove the lower windshield plates by removing the six black round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the windshield ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239 TAE 12 Lower the windshield gently until it contacts the rubber hood bumpers 13 Secure the windshield by passing a cinch strap through the footman hoop on the center of the hood and on the center of the windshield frame Tighten the strap to secure the windshield in place Raising the Windshield and Replacing Side Bars 1 Raise the windshield 2 Loosely attach the rear of the side bar to the sport bar Refer to Step 4 of Lowering Windshield And Removing Side Bars earlier in this section e Reattach the sport bar Velcro covering 240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie 3 Attach the front of the side bar to the windshield 5 Install the lower windshield plates with the six black frame round headed Torx head screws using a 40 Torx head driver on each side of the base of the wi e Install the top two hex bolts 13 mm first then the lower side hex bolt 13 mm The lower side bolt will not align until the top
223. eplacing Side O Closing The Sunrider 234 PL TM 239 Bl Folding Windshield 234 W Rear Window Features Hard Top Only 241 O Lowering The Windshield And Removing Side Bars eee 236 B Rear Window Defroster If Equipped 242 3 84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical adjustment of the mirror The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 To receive maximum benefit adjust the outside mirror s WARNING to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror convex mirror will look smaller and farther away ara atas passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side mirror Outside Rearview Mirror 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Vanity Mirrors Vanity mir
224. equency kHz P MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 48 64 96 128 44 and 48 160 192 VBR ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for ID3 version 1 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback of MP3 WMA Files When a medium containing MP3 WMA data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 WMA files Loading times for playback of MP3 WMA files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M LIST Button DISC Mode for MP3 WMA Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the sel
225. er occupants to buckle their seat belts Once the warning is triggered the BeltAlert will con tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled The 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie BeltAlert will be reactivated if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer or by following these steps NOTE The following steps must occur within the first 60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON or START position Chrysler Group LLC does not recom mend deactivating BeltAlert 1 Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and buckle the driver s seat belt 2 Turn the ignition key to the ACC ON position do not start the engine and wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off 3 Within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle unbuckle and then re buckle the driver s seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds ending with the seat belt buckled 4 Turn the ignition key to the OFF position A single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming BeltAlert can be reactivated by repeating this procedure NOTE Although BeltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened
226. er with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Continued CAUTION Continued e Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism e RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 NOTE Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or so
227. ery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the vehicle s battery Continued 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee CAUTION Continued e Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not hang any type of accessory or acces sory bracket from the plug CUPHOLDERS Front Cupholders The front cupholders are located in the center console Front Cupholders NOTE The front cupholder insert is removable for cleaning ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Rear Cupholders STORAGE The rear cupholders are located on the back of the center console Console Storage Compartment To lock or unlock the storage compartment insert the ignition key and turn To open the storage compartment press the latch and lift the cover Rear Cupholders Center Console 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Rear St
228. es of the driver and the front passenger and position every one for the best interaction with the front airbag 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie If a Deployment Occurs The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side airbags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately e As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in
229. ess and hold the left button on the instrument cluster for two to three seconds to switch from English to Metric displays Reset Change Display Press and hold the left button on the instrument cluster while function is being displayed to reset or change the display 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M The following trip displays can be reset or changed e AVG ECO changes to present fuel economy e ET will reset display Trip Conditions Average Fuel Economy AVG ECO This display shows the average fuel economy Estimated Range DTE This display shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This esti mated distance is based on the most recent trip informa tion Average Fuel Economy x Fuel Remaining This display cannot be reset Elapsed Time ET This display shows the accumulated ignition ON time since the last reset Trip Odometer ODO ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B or to ECO Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last reset Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last reset ECO Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON ind
230. essary Replace the ignition cables Inspect the CV joints L Replace the spark plugs Inspect exhaust system _J Flush and replace the engine coolant if Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary not done at 60 months M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 513 108 000 Miles 180 000 km or 108 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 114 000 Miles 190 000 km or 114 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H
231. ever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off 031407551 Turn Signal Operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound when the driver s door is opened High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released Front Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is located on the multi function lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking or low beam headlights and pull out the end of the lever NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the parking lights or the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights w
232. f You Stall or Begin to Lose Headway If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately apply the brake Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE Back slowly down the hill allowing ee STARTING AND OPERATING 361 engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNING If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade never attempt to turn around To do so may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle which may result in severe injury Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes Never drive diagonally across a hill always drive straight up or down Driving Through Water Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner You should only drive through areas which are designated and approved You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the environment You should know your vehicle s abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong You should never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested water into the engine air intake If the engine stalls do not attempt to restart it Determine if it has ingested water fir
233. f your vehicle e For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs 392 kg TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 EXAMPLE 2 EXAMPLE 3 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 130 Ibs sg Occupant 3 160 Ibs Occupant 1 210 lbs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 Ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 393 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 394 STARTING AND OPERATING ee WARNING Safety WARNING Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion shock Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION Tire Pressure lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect sati
234. feature enhances off road performance by allowing the vehicle to start when in 4L without having to press the clutch pedal The 4WD Indicator Light will illuminate when the transfer case has been shifted into this mode 330 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee Automatic Transmission If Equipped Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or PARK position Apply the brake before shifting to any driving range Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Tip Start Feature Automatic Transmission Only Turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run but will automatically disengage itself when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 sec onds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure Extreme Cold Weather below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from
235. fer case lever firmly to the desired position Do not pause with the transfer case in N Neutral NOTE Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped however difficulty may oc cur due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth align ment and shift completion to occur The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph 3 to 5 km h ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 WARNING Failure to engage a position completely can cause transfer case damage or loss of power and vehicle control You could have an injury accident Do not drive the vehicle unless the transfer case is fully engaged TRAC LOK REAR AXLE IF EQUIPPED The Trac Lok rear axle provides a constant driving force to both rear wheels and reduces wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one driving wheel If traction differs between the two rear wheels the differential automati cally proportions the usable torque by providing more torque to the wheel that has traction Trac Lok is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions With both rear wheels on a slippery surface a slight application of the accelerator will supply maxi mum traction WARNING On vehicles equipped with a limited slip differen tial never run the engine with one rear wheel o
236. ff the ground The vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground and cause you to lose control of your vehicle 348 STARTING AND OPERATING AXLE LOCK TRU LOK RUBICON MODELS The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls WAY AXLE BAR LOCK Axle Lock Switch This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle in 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the bottom of the AXLE LOCK switch once to lock the rear axle only the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the bottom of the switch again to lock the front axle the Front Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate When the rear axle is locked pressing the switch again will lock or unlock the front axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axles are fully locked or unlocked To unlock the axles press the top of the AXLE LOCK switch Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position eee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 REAR AXLE LOCK FOUR WHEEL DRIVE NON RUBICON MODELS IF EQUIPPED The REAR AXLE LOCK switch is located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls This feature will only activate when the following con ditions are met e Key in ignition vehicle i
237. fore recre ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts 1 Turn the engine off 2 Press the brake pedal disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move even if the transmission is in PARK The parking 5 Start the engine brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle 4 Shift the transfer case lever into N Neutral 6 Shift the automatic transmission into DRIVE or the manual transmission into gear 432 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 7 Release the brake pedal and ensure that there is no CAUTION vehicle movement Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans 8 Turn the engine off and turn the ignition switch to the 5 en mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in ACC position N Neutral and the engine running With the trans 9 Shift the automatic transmission into PARK fer case in N Neutral ensure that the engine is off prior to shifting the transmission into PARK refer to steps 8 9 above 10 Apply the parking brake 11 Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle with the tow bar Shifting Out of Neutral N Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for 13 Disconnect the negative battery cable and secure it normal usage away from the negative battery post 12 Release the parking brake 1 Turn the engine off 2 Shift the automatic transmission into NEUTRAL or press the clut
238. front seat s fully forward 4 Unplug the wiring harness connector 3 Remove the trim access door from the bottom of NOTE If the red latch on the connector is locked push B pillar the red latch to the right until you can only see the latch on one end right of the connector This will unlock the connector tab allowing the tab to be pressed down and enabling the harness to be disconnected 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE mmm quee e EM MEET DO OR L OCKS Manual Door Locks The front two door models and rear doors four door models are equipped with a rocker type interior door lock To lock the door when leaving your vehicle press the LOCK position and close the door 5 Unhook the door strap from the body hook 6 With the door open lift the door to clear hinge pins from their hinges and remove door To reinstall the door s perform the previous steps in the opposite order Manual Door Lock ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 NOTE The ignition key that is used to start the vehicle _ TI is used to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and console storage WARNINCG e For personal security reasons and safety in an accident lock the vehicle doors when you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or f
239. ft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media suppo
240. full e Tighten the gas cap about 1 4 turn until you hear one e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near click This is an indication that the cap is properly the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tightened tank is filled e If the gas cap is not tightened properly the MIL will Continued come on Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled 414 STARTING AND OPERATING xe Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel has been added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose improperly installed or damaged If the system detects a malfunction the gASCAP message will display in the odometer display Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar This label contains the month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front and rear
241. g The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range CAUTION 19 Cruise Indicator Driving with a hot engine cooling system could epus Thisindicator shows when the electronic speed damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H control system is turned on pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with 20 AWD Indicator Light If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in AWD the four wheel drive mode and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to gether forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Main taining Your Vehicle Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized deal ership for service 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 21 Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO disp
242. g column or shift lever could vehicle begins from a stop in low gear with automatic fecu upshift to second gear The vehicle will not shift into Never tace the engine with fie brakes omand the third gear vehicle in gear and never hold the vehicle on an incline without applying the brakes These prac 1 First tices can overheat and damage the transmission This range is used for hard pulling at low speeds in mud When rocking a stuck vehicle by moving be sand snow or on steep grades The vehicle begins and tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the stays in low gear with no upshift This gear provides wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain engine compression braking at low speeds damage may result ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 Torque Converter Clutch e 4L Four wheel drive low range A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been a ox ud added to the automatic transmission of this vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly differ ent feeling or response during normal operation in high gear When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera tion the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages RSS FOUR WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION COMMAND TRAC I OR ROCK TRAC IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions Precautions The transfer case provides four mode positions EISE Four Wheel Drive Shift Controls The transfer case is in
243. g ventilation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain the desired interior condi tions 045609116 3 rete yt M Climate Controls 316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air distribution as identified by the symbols 81915f2a Panel p Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level gt e Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets J NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Qe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield gt Defrost CH Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting Blower Control Use this control center rotary knob
244. gages is normal ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions may need Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on WARNING moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain and or more frequent downshifts auto transmission only may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve To Accelerate for Passing hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the could lose control An accident could be the result pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLET There are two 12 Volt
245. ge effective only if language supported by disc If you want to select a language not listed then scroll down and select other Enter the four digit country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Audio Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitle Language If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle language effective only if the language is supported by the disc You can select a language not listed by scrolling down and selecting other Enter the country code using 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the number and then push to select Subtitles If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle Off or On Audio DRC If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio dynamic range The default is set to High and under this setting dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the setting is Normal Aspect Ratio If Equipped Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide screen pan sca
246. ger along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces EA 022607342 Latch Anchorages Two Door Models 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie Latch Anchorages Four Door Models In addition there are tether strap anchorages behind each rear seating position located on the back of the seat RE 8191291a Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Next attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the anchorage bars pushing aside the seat cover material Then locate the tether anchorage directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage being careful to route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchor and the child restraint Finally tighten all three straps as you push the child restrai
247. h and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn On Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 1 Press the RKE transmitter LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the RKE transmitter PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn On Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is activated the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of the system To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock NOTE The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be turned on or off using the following steps 1 Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the RKE transmitter LOCK button Re lease both buttons 3 Tes
248. h types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not e Before buying any restraint system make sure that it necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a has a label certifying that it meets all applicable oafety ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child restraint ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode e n the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times to shorten it Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out e f the belt still cannot be tightened or if pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect the latch plate from the buckle turn the buckle around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still cannot make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the restraint exactly as the manufacturer s instructions tell you e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the s
249. hat an oil change is neces sary Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate this means that service is required for your vehicle Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km NOTE e The oil change indicator message will not monitor the time since the last oil change Change your vehicle s oil if it has been six months since your last oil change even if the oil change indicator message is NOT illuminated eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 501 e Change your engine oil more often if you drive your vehicle off road for an extended period of time e Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months which ever comes first Your dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If this sched uled oil change is performed by someone other than your dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Instrument Cluster Description Odometer Trip Odometer in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer sol
250. he DVD by pushing the SELECT button if equipped e Subtitle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc if equipped e Audio Stream Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch to different audio languages if supported on the disc if equipped e Angle Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc if equipped NOTE e The available selections for each of the above entries varies depending upon the disc e These selections can only be made while playing a DVD e VES Power Allows you to turn VES ON and OFF if equipped ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 e VES Lock Locks out rear VES remote controls if equipped e VES CHI CH2 Allows the user to change the mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by pressing the AUDIO SELECT button if equipped e Set Home Clock Pressing the SELECT button allows you to set the clock Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob again to save changes e Player Defaults Selecting this item will allow the user to scroll through the following items and set defaults according to customer preference Menu Language If Equipped Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the default startup DVD menu langua
251. he air conditioning A light will illumi nate when the air conditioning system is engaged Once the air conditioning is engaged use a combination of the mode control fan speed control and tempera 81caad38 ture control to achieve your de sired interior temperature In cold or damp weather the use of the Recirculation mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum de fogging select the Outside Air position NOTE The Recirculation mode will not operate in the floor mix or defrost modes NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds 322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M MAX A C For maximum cooling select ei ther the Panel or Bi Level position using the mode control Then press the A C and the Recir culation buttons so that both lights are illuminated and set the temperature control to its coolest 81cab384 setting NOTE e Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor mix or defrost modes e Refer to Recirculation Control in this section for proper or extended use of this position Operating Tips Window Fogging Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside the vehicle is high This often occurs in mild or cool temperatures when it s rainy or humid In most cases turning on the air conditioning pressing the snowflake button will clear the fog Adjust the te
252. he appropri ate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition e Oversteer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position e Understeer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position The ESP TCS Indicator Light located in the instru ment cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes active The ESP TCS Indicator Light also flashes when TCS is active If 3 8 STARTING AND OPERATING ee the ESP TCS Indicator Light begins to flash during acceleration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions WARNING The Electronic Stability Program ESP cannot pre vent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ESP cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others The ESP system has three available operating modes in 4H range The system has one operating mode in 4L range Two
253. he clamps clips or retainers securing the soft top Do not force or pry the soft top framework when opening or closing Damage to the top may result curtain up unless the side curtains are also open Dangerous exhaust gases which can kill could enter the vehicle The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed only for protection against the elements Do not rely on them to contain occupants within the vehicle or to protect against injury during an accident Remember always wear seat belts ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203 CAUTION NOTE Do not remove any of the three attachment knobs unless you are planning on installing the hard top Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material e It is recommended that the top be free of water prior to opening it Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior Careless handling and storage of the soft top may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior The soft top must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior 204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE iii Quick Steps for Lowering the Soft Top 1 Remove the side and back windows 81925914 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205 3 Fold header rearwar
254. he engine being shut off after two seconds ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 sec onds it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer NOTE The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting sys tems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle Once a Sentry Key is programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN Keep the PIN in a secure location This number is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Du plication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by following the customer key programming procedure This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one that has never been pr
255. he key is released If this occurs continue cranking with the accel erator pedal pushed all the way to the floor Release the accelerator pedal and the key once the engine is running smoothly 332 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start Automatic Transmission Only If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any excess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 sec onds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater cor
256. hen the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control Daytime Running Lights If Equipped The headlights come on at a low intensity level after the vehicle has been driven approximately 3 ft 1 m They will turn off when the vehicle is turned off or when the headlights are switched on Interior Lights The overhead light will come on when a door is opened It may also be turned on by rotating the control for the dimmer switch on the multifunction lever fully upward The overhead light will automatically turn off in approxi mately 20 minutes if a door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the dome light position Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the overhead light operation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Cargo Lamp The courtesy and dome lights will turn on when the front doors are opened when the dimmer control rotating wheel on the right side of the switch is rotated to the upward detent position or if equipped when the UN LOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The rearmost cargo lamp may be turned on by pressing either of
257. hen you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism RES is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting a CD Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE BEjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M TIME Button Press this button to change the displa
258. hift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up shift speeds may not apply Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH KM H gine 39 55 76 90 Cruise 10 16 19 27 37 41 31 43 60 66 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Downshifting CAUTION Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is recommended to preserve brakes when driving down steep hills In addition downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed Downshift progressively Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch When descending a hill be very careful to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can cause valve damage and or clutch disc damage even if the clutch pedal is pressed Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds WARNING CAUTION Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface The drive wheels could lose their Failure to follow the maximum recommended down shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed and or damage the clutch disc even if the clutch pedal is pressed grip and the vehicle could skid 336 STARTING AND OPERATING Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH KM H Gear Selec 80 129 70 113 50 81 30 48 15 24 Reverse Shifting To shift into REVERSE bring the vehicle to a complete stop
259. hin five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types 16 Digit Character Program Type Display No program type Adult Hits Adit Hit ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 16 Digit Character Display Countr Countr News News By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected Music Type name The Music Type function only operates when in the FM d If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station 16 Digit Character Display Program Type Program Type 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between the following items NOTE Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to scroll through the entries Push the AUDIO SELECT button to select an entry and make changes e DVD Enter When the disc is in DVD Menu mode selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current highlighted selection Use the remote control to scroll up and down the menu if equipped gt I e DVD Play Options Selecting the DVD Play Options will display the following e DISC Play Pause You can toggle between playing the DVD and pausing t
260. hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for addi tional information Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max Trailer Hitch Industry Standards Class I Light Dut 2 000 Ibs 907 kg Class II Medium 3 500 lbs 1 587 kg Dut Class III Heavy Dut 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Heavy Dut Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 420 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Axle Model GCWR Gross Frontal Max GTW Max Trailer Transmission Combined Wt Area Gross Trailer Tongue Wt Rating Wt See Note 3 8L Manual 3 21 Two Door X Model 5 049 Ibs 25 sq ft 1 000 lbs 100 Ibs 45 kg AWD 2 290 kg 2 32 sq m 453 kg 3 8L Manual 3
261. ht A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare wheel if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly The matching full size spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road tires A low spare tire will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound I V The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will 4 illuminate in the instrument cluster and an au dible chime will be activated when one or more of the four active road tire pressures are low Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures have been received The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h to receive this information The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and will remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists A system fault can occur by any of the following scenarios 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radi
262. ic rearward will allow the material to sag and may block the rearview mirror FOLDING WINDSHIELD The fold down windshield and removable side bars on your vehicle are structural elements that can provide some protection in some accidents The windshield also provides some protection against weather road debris and intrusion of small branches and other objects Do not drive your vehicle on road with the windshield down and the side bars removed as you lose the protec tion these structural elements can provide If required for certain off road uses the side bars can be removed and the windshield folded down However the protection afforded by these features is then lost If you remove the side bars and fold down the windshield drive slowly and cautiously It is recommended that the speed of the vehicle be limited to 10 mph 16 km h with low range operation preferred if you are driving off road with the windshield folded down ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235 Raise the windshield and reinstall the side bars as soon as WARNING Continued the task that required their removal is completed and a before you return to on road driving Both you and your Do not drive your vehicle unless the windshield is passenger should wear seat belts at all times on road and securely fastened either up or down off road regardless of whether the windshield is raised Eye protection such as goggles should be worn at or fol
263. icator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Compass Temperature Display NOTE If the vehicle is equipped with a Chrysler Uconnect gps Navigation Radio the NAV system will provide the compass direction and the variance and calibration menus will be unavailable The compass will perform accurately based on GPS signals instead of the Earth s magnetic field This display provides the outside temperature and one of eight compass readings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing WARNING Even if the display still reads a few degrees above 32 F 0 C the road surface may be icy particularly in woods or on bridges Drive carefully under such conditions to prevent an accident and possible per sonal injury or property damage Compass Calibration The compass on your vehicle will automatically calibrate when new and will continuously adjust itself over the life of the vehicle If the CAL indicator is on or flashing drive slowly under 10 MPH 16 kmh in an open area until the CAL indicator is off NOTE e A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks et
264. ight not have The Trailer Tow Package will include a four pin wiring brakes when you need them and could have an harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and accident connector Continued NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness 428 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following illustration 057003766 Four Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch slippage Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in this range the O D OFF feature should be selected NOTE Using O D OFF while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking ee STARTING AND OPERATING 429 The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation
265. ill occur even if the message was previously cleared an emergency evasive maneuver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability The Full Off mode is intended for off road use only Disabling ESP for Modified Vehicles 4WD Models Only Vehicles modified with larger tires and or suspension lifts may experience early ESP activations as compared to a non modified production vehicle depending on lift size tire size suspension changes and or driving habits If early ESP activations are experienced while driving a modified vehicle the additional ability to permanently turn off ESP is available A steering wheel ESP button maneuver must be performed to permanently disable 382 STARTING AND OPERATING ee ESP and defeat the functionality of the ESP switch Repeating the procedure will return the system to normal ESP operation and restore ESP switch functionality al lowing ESP Partial or Off modes WARNING With ESP in the permanent disable mode enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESP and ERM sys tems is unavailable In an emergency evasive maneu ver the ESP and ERM systems will not engage to assist in maintaining stability This disabled mode is intended for off highway or off road use only Ve hicle modifications requiring the owner to configure the vehicle in the ESP disabled mode will seriously affect the vehicle s roadworthiness and safety and may lead to loss of control
266. in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position e f the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind the back NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Cana dian residents should refer to Transport Canada s web site for additional information http www tc gc ca roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index htm Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap having en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 a hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a means for adjusting the tension of the strap In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be route
267. ining security The system has a range of approximately 328 ft 100 m WARNING NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an auto matic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start e Ignition key removed from ignition switch e Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon How to Use Remote Start oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Car All of the following conditions must be met before the bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious engine will remote start injury or death when inhaled Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start e Doors closed System windows door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death e Hood closed e Shift lever in PARK To Enter Remote Start Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode e The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position before you
268. inte serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 2 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 3 As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 4 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you nor
269. ires 00 000 00 ce eee 395 AUD 122349599909 5x2 PEOR PRESE RCRR es 50 Airbag Deploy meni se quce cioe uo ge Ros oa os rer n 58 Sueca ME PME 60 77 252 duras Malirenence 4240457505245 Roper ae rini 59 PDA IIS 4 bts eee EFRA 57 Alw LSBU 6435444 boas POS dere d md 202 Alarm Security Alarm 4324445459655 t5 54 17 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 8 Antenna Satellite Radio sn 311 Antifreeze Engine Coolant ea ror egets 496 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 369 371 Anti Lock Warning Light iussum 251 Appeare Cole usas x 2 PEGS 99 2 Hee 3 478 Arming Theft System Security Alarm 18 Assistance IOWO wat 2 bees oe goed Hae ata ans 101 Auto Down Power Windows 99 Automatic Transmissi vases v9 er ray iugi 473 Plaid and Filter Changes 4 esaet Re re 473 Fi id Level Check 12 229 nien m ES 473 liic m 473 S RINGES cessas mi reread nana ee a 339 OO perenah ear 339 Special AGGUIVES 429a s saner xy Pobre 9 dera d 475 Torque Gonverce 21224 4158 iiie 23 cdd d 343 Auxiliary Electrical Outlet Power Outlet 146 Auxiliary Power Outlet Lsowres ns prre d 6 49 146 PICO TET 348 349 A INDEX 531 PUI POR 459 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 23 Belts Sea amp 244 2 4 oe eas Eder ENS im uS 39 77 Body Mechanism Lubrication 461 Brake Assist Systemi esis 3 oa OSS ritta ahina 372 Brake Assist Warning Light 261 Bra
270. is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant bottle e Check the engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain the engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains a
271. ith side airbags do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the side airbags the performance could be adversely affected and or objects could be pushed into you causing serious injury Continued not attach cupholders or any other objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the objects into occupants causing serious injury Do not cover or place items on the airbag covers These items may cause serious injury during in flation Do not store or place items under the front seats You may damage the airbag wiring harnesses The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on severity and type of collision Along with the seat belts Advanced Front Airbags work with the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side airbags also work with seat belts to improve occu pant protection Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in that position Children that are not big enough
272. ith slower water currents in depths greater than the vehicle s running ground clearance You should never attempt to cross flowing water which is deeper than the vehicle s running ground clearance Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle down stream and out of control if the water is deep enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle s body Before you proceed determine the speed of the current the water s depth approach angle bottom condition and if there are any obstacles Then cross at an angle heading slightly upstream using the low and slow technique WARNING Never drive through fast moving deep water It can push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control This could put you and your passengers at risk of injury or drowning After Driving Off Road Off road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than does most on road driving After going off road it is 364 STARTING AND OPERATING xe always a good idea to check for damage That way you After extended operation in mud sand water or can get any problems taken care of right away and have similar dirty conditions have the radiator brake ro your vehicle ready when you need it tors wheels brake linings and axle yokes inspected e Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle and cleaned as soon as possible Check tires body structure steering suspension and WARNING exhaust system for damage Abrasive material in a
273. ition 10 Remove connector from bulb 11 Push connector onto new bulb base and push the connector locking tab to the lock position CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 12 Reinstall bulb housing Rotate the bulb 1 4 turn clockwise 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Front Park Turn Signal Front Fog Lamp 1 Remove the front grille Turn the retainers along the 1 Locate the front fog lamp in the front fascia and top 1 4 turn counterclockwise and remove disconnect the electrical connector from underneath 2 Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at one side 2 Squeeze locking tabs on bulb inward toward center of and working toward the other the bulb Pull bulb straight out of housing 3 Turn the socket assembly 1 4 turn counterclockwise CAUTION and remove from housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil Front Side Marker contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface clean the 1 Reach under the front fender flare and locate the front bulb with rubbing alcohol side marker socket 2 Turn the socket assembly counterclockwise 1 3 turn and remove it from the housing Pull the bulb straight from the socket to replace ee MAINTAINING YO
274. k Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher TO i lt lt Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the spare tire jack and tools from the stored location 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel lug nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground 3 Assemble the jack and jacking tools Connect the jack handle driver to the extension then to the lug wrench 4 Operate the jack from the front or the rear of the vehicle Place the jack under the axle tube as shown Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441 060505249 2 1 Rear Jacking Location 2 Front Jacking Location Jacking Locations 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNING Raising the vehi
275. ke Control System Electronic 2s 6 PE Rs 371 Drake GYSIEM ere s eter PS PRU CRUS E A ERE 471 Anti Lock ABS suu vta rues SEPT 369 371 Master VIDIGE 264 sace acm ood aE 4 ao 471 DERE aus Gna 288 Gaye oo E PUER P Sepa Benes 366 Warming LIEUE C 250 Brake Transmission Interlock 337 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 75 Bulb Replacement os 2223 ie mm Res 492 493 BUDS EIE 4 x29 d E rri ee PEA Ge RE 78 Capacities DIO 66 4 64455n5h2u nes prie ES 496 Caps Filler j TT 412 Ower DICOS sesir repi fepe d E d Rd 365 Car WOSKCS 2 secs ne do deam ey ees eae an ees 479 Carbon Monoxide Warning 76 411 Carpo IG P rm 137 Cargo Vehicle Loading gt rerrrererisesssra 414 Cellular Phone aaa a 86 315 Center High Mounted Stop Light 495 CarurneadonDdbel acaaovan s v9 REA cana gies 414 Changing A Flat Tire sw cone d Yao wee dadien 438 Chart Vite DADOS 6 42 aaa eee Boe ee Yoh ae RAE 386 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator 51 405 eae ba eee oe he eee 259 453 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 75 din cmi 2 75 Child Restraint 12 2 RES 62 63 69 72 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 67 69 532 INDEX M Crile Delt 6 p444 abe on bbe hn e ees Bees eeee 66 Climate Control o 52 so Sao 404 Hae ee eee 315 HOCK gem sees ea ee EE 270 285 286 290 299 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 314 COM Pics UP
276. king on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle 368 STARTING AND OPERATING M WARNING WARNING Continued e Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injuty e Never use the PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be CAUTION seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brak
277. king station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your cellular phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following local laws and phone use All attention should be kept on the roadway ahead Failure to do so may result in an accident causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button Ihe driver side upper windshield trim contains the microphone for the Uconnect Phone and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons that will enable you to access the Uconnect Phone 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Voice Command Button Actual button location may vary with the ra t VR dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any Uconnect Phone features Refer to your cellular servi
278. l at the top of the windshield 4 4 Starting with the front of the door frame clip it over the metal side bar and then clip the rear making sure that the material for the side bar covers is not pinched by the door frame 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Door Frame Removal Four Door Models WARNING 1 Unscrew and remove the two forward most door frame attachment knobs Use both hands to remove the door frames The door frames will fold and could cause injury if both hands are not used 2 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the upper front of the front door frame ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 3 Pull the frame toward you with your front hand to 5 Place one hand on the upper rear and one hand on the remove the frame from the vehicle upper front of the rear door frame Pull the frame toward you with your rear hand to remove the frame from the vehicle 4 Unscrew and remove the remaining door frame at tachment knob on the rear door frame 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Screw the knob back into the door frame and fold for WARNING storage Store in a secure location Never store the door frames in your vehicle In an I event of an accident a loose door frame many cause pe ees personal injury If removed always store the door os fp es frames outside of the vehicle Door Frame Installation Four Door Models
279. lace if necessary M A N Li E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer eee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 507 48 000 Miles 80 000 km or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter d Rotate tires L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 54 000 Miles 90 000 km or 54 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 508 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 60 000 Miles 100 000 km or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Repla
280. lacing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Multimedia Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stopping until you release it SCAN Button When Equipped Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Except REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the song title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display INFO Button REU Radio Pressing the INFO button will display information about Artist Song Title and Composer if available Pressing the INFO button again will close the INFO screen RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next chan
281. lant flow and fan speed Winter Operation When operating the system during the winter months make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Mi Starting Procedures 04 329 GO Manual Transmission If Equipped 929 D Automatic Transmission If Equipped 330 O Notmal Starting ausser 9h 480 Rede ig 330 O Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 10 D rrr 330 HIfEneme Fails To Start soo rnv 331 O After Saring 4h tate ee nni P HIER REA OR 332 ll Engine Block Heater If Equipped 332 Bl Manual Transmission If Equipped PUN ne og PIE P E hee ee Eee GO Downshifting oO Reverse Shifting ll Automatic Transmission If Equipped O Key Ignition Park Interlock O Brake Transmission Interlock System O Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override 326 STARTING AND OPERATING M HI Automatic Transmission With Overdrive ll Four Wheel Drive Operation Command Trac I Or Rock Trac If Equipped O Operating
282. lay Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Press and hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilome ters The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 22 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission 23 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Each tire including the spare if provided 1 should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability ee UNDERSTA
283. lay the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment Syst
284. lead and lead compounds Always wash hands after handling the battery 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning battery that the positive cable is attached to the system as the chemicals can damage your air condi positive post and the negative cable is attached to the tioning components Such damage is not covered by negative post Battery posts are marked 4 positive the New Vehicle Limited Warranty and negative and are identified on the battery case Also if a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage WARNING e Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other Air Conditioner Maintenance unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause For best possible performance your air conditioner the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer Warranty Information Book located on the DVD at the start of each warm season This service should for further warranty information include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension shoul
285. lemporary spare tires are high pressure compact Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only 386 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Tires designed to this standard have the letter T e High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded tion Example T145 80D18 103M into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in ee STARTING AND OPERATING 387 EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carr H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions a
286. ler ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 505 30 000 Miles 50 000 km or 30 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the transfer case fluid M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer 506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 36 000 Miles 60 000 km or 36 Months Maintenance Service 42 000 Miles 70 000 km or Schedule 42 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule Rotate tires JJ Change the engine oil and engine oil If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary J Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals rep
287. level the following procedure must be used 1 Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating temperature 2 The vehicle must be on level ground 3 Fully apply the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion ending with the shift lever in PARK Remove the dipstick wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated 6 Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level should be between the HOT upper reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat ing temperature Verify that a solid coating of oil is seen on both sides of the dipstick If the fluid is low add as required into the dipstick tube Do not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level NOTE If itis necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature the fluid level should be between the two cold lower holes on the dipstick with the fluid at approximately 70 F 21 C room tempera ture If the fluid level is correctly established at room temperature it should be between the HOT upper reference holes when the transmission reaches 180 F 21 C Remember it is best to check the level at the normal operating temperature CAUTION Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50 F 10 C it may not register on the dipstick Do
288. line with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system com ponents Problems that result from using methanol gasoline blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol ee STARTING AND OPERATING 409 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolo
289. ll display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds 4 The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at Step 2 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or cou
290. llowing limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are
291. lt are meant to be used together 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision Removing Slack from Belt NOTE The Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the driver s seat belt is buckled ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle J WARNING The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t allow the belt to retract fully be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across WARNINCG your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts possible and keep it snug A twisted belt cannot do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you cannot straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt
292. lue will also be displayed To change the zone press the left button once to increment the zone The default is Zone 8 After Zone 15 the values will wrap around to Zone 1 When the correct zone is displayed per the Compass Variance Zone Map for the zone that the vehicle is located in wait for about five seconds then the trip computer will store the variance value in memory and the compass will resume normal operation 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The U S Metric display will change from En Outside Temperature glish to Metric or Metric to English before the VAR If the outside temperature is more than 131 F 55 C the symbol appears however it will revert back to its display will show 131 F 55 C When the outside tem original setting after programming the compass func perature is less than 40 F 40 C the display will tions show 40 F 40 C 2 1 3 4 040506040 Compass Variance Map UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 MEDIA CENTER 230 REQ AM FM STEREO Operating Instructions Radio Mode RADIO AND 6 DISC CD DVD CHANGER m i MP3 WMA AUX JACK NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right seer thoracic acr les Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Press the ON VOLUME control knob a second eR ae ta te o ea ot
293. luids Lubricants and Genu ine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information ees MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 CAUTION CAUTION Continued e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than e This vehicle has not been designed for use with the specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection If a non HOAT engine cool ant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti freeze Use of Propylene Glycol base engine cool ant antifreeze is not recommended Adding Engine Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up to 5 Years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before replace ment To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Continued Organic Additive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi tional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the antifreeze engine coolant antifreeze an
294. luminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 e Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory cooling performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to Maintenance Schedule for further information WARNINCG Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Power Disc Brakes Disc brakes do not require adjustment however several hard stops during the break in period are recommended to seat the linings and wear off any foreign material Brake Master Cylinder The fluid level in the master cylinders should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced If necessary add fluid to bring level to the full level mark on the side of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder With disc brakes fluid le
295. mage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade SAE 5W 20 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils Synthetic engine oils can be used if the recommended oil quality requirements are met and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and
296. mally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed any procedure yourself maintenance schedule there are other components which l i ici l in the f l NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control FU Se Hen OF ESP aceMMeny an Mie LUEUne systems may void your warranty and could result in civil CAUTION penalties being assessed against you e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per
297. marks of Digital The ater Systems Inc MEDIA CENTER 730N 430 RER REN RBZ AM FM STEREO RADIO AND CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code is located on the lower right side of the unit s faceplate The REN RER and RBZ radios contain a CD DVD player USB port and a 30 gigabyte hard drive HDD Sirius Satellite Radio is optional The 6 5 in 16 5 cm touch screen allows for easy menu selection The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System GPS based Navigation system Refer to your Uconnect Multimedia REN RER or RBZ user s manual for detailed operating instructions ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped For the radio refer to Voice Command in Understand ing The Features Of Your Vehicle Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Clock Setting Procedure RBZ Radio To Manually Set the Clock 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 4 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with
298. mber dialed is based on the for the cellular phone directly country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Please refer to the 24 Hour Iowing Assistance coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the 24 Hour Towing Assistance Card Your phone must be turned on and paired to the Uconnect Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cellular phone has network coverage and stays paired to the Uconnect Phone e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and Towing Assistance say Setup followed by Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance Paging e Press the button to begin To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Iowing Assistance 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an autom
299. mperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As the temperature gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield Adjust the temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the defrost mode Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a non filming cleaning solution vinegar and water works very well will help prevent contaminates cigarette ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323 smoke perfumes etc from sticking to the windows Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging Summer Operation Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant during summer to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Refer to Fluids and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the proper coolant type When using the air conditioner in extremely heavy traffic in hot weather especially when towing a trailer addi tional engine cooling may be required If this situation is encountered operate the transmission in a lower gear to increase engine RPM coolant flow and fan speed When stopped in heavy traffic it may be necessary to shift into NEUTRAL N and press the accelerator slightly for fast idle operation to increase coo
300. n loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 e Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previous downloaded phonebook is available for use e Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu lar phone is accessible e Only the cellular phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book e This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the cellular phone The changes are trans ferred and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone allows the user to download entries from their phone via Bluetooth To use this feature press the eo button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phone book entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF Y
301. n and letter box AutoPlay If Equipped When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted it will bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the movie In some rare cases the DVD player may not auto play the main title In such cases use the MENU button on the remote control to select desired title to play NOTE The user will have to set these defaults before loading a disc If changes are made to these settings after a disc is loaded changes will not be effective Also the defaults are effective only if the disc supports the customer preferred settings AM and FM Buttons Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode SET Button To Set the Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be s
302. n 4L Low range e Vehicle speed should be 10 mph 16 km h or less To activate the system press the REAR AXLE LOCK switch down to lock the rear axle the Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light will illuminate press the switch up to unlock the rear axle NOTE The indicator lights will flash until the axle is fully locked or unlocked The rear axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken out of 4L Low range or the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position ELECTRONIC SWAY BAR DISCONNECT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic discon necting stabilizer sway bar This system allows greater front suspension travel in off road situations This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch 5 located on the lower switch bank below the climate controls 350 STARTING AND OPERATING A bu when activation conditions are not met The stabilizer sway bar should remain in on road mode during normal driving conditions WARNING Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph 29 km h you may lose control of the vehicle which could result in serious injury The front stabilizer bar enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main 053010720 taining control of the vehicle The system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph 29 km h This is indicated by a flashing
303. n washing the vehicle water pressure RINSING Be sure to remove all traces of cleaner by directed at the weather strip seals may cause water rinsing the top thoroughly with clean water Remember to leak into the vehicle s interior to allow the top to dry before lowering it Careless handling and storage of the removable CAUTION roof panels may damage the seals causing water to leak into the vehicle s interior The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Improper installation can cause water to leak into the vehicle s interior Failure to follow these cautions may cause interior water damage stains or mildew on the top material Continued 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Care of Fabric Top Windows CAUTION Your vehicle s fabric top has pliable plastic windows which can be scratched unless special care is taken by following these directions 1 Never use a dry cloth to remove dust Instead use a microfiber towel or soft cotton cloth moistened with cold or warm clean water and wipe across the window not up and down MOPAR Jeep Soft Glass Window Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all plastic win dows without scratching It removes fine scratches to improve visibility and provides UV protection to help prevent yellowing 2 When washing never use hot water or anything stronger than a mild soap Never use solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning agents 3 Always rinse th
304. nce symbol appears 2 The current variance value will also be displayed Once in the variance mode it is necessary to release the button and then press and hold it again approximately 10 seconds until CAL is displayed solid not blinking ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 3 Manual compass calibration has been initiated Drive the vehicle slowly in one or more circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from large metal objects until the CAL symbol is extinguished When the CAL symbol is no longer displayed the compass is calibrated and should display correct head ings Verify proper calibration by checking North N South S East E and West W If the compass does not appear accurate repeat the calibration procedure in an other area Compass Variance VAR Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference Setting the Compass Variance Refer to the variance map for the correct compass vari ance zone To check the variance zone the ignition must be ON Press and hold the left button located on the instrument cluster for approximately 10 seconds to enter the variance mode and release the button when the VAR symbol appears The current variance va
305. nd accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your tires Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes CAUTION Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will become high centered Getting High Centered If you get hung up or high centered on an object get out of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is hung up on where it is contacting the underbody and what is the best direction to recover the vehicle Depend ing on what you are in contact with jack the vehicle up and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of the high point when you let the vehicle down You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off the object CAUTION Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects increases the risk of underbody damage Hill Climbing Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under standing of your abilities and your vehicle s limitations Hills can cause serious problems Some are just too steep to climb and should not be attempted You should always feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities You should always climb hills straight up and down Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Before Climbing A Steep Hill As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness Determine if it is too steep Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail
306. nd posted speed limits blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire pressure Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire 388 STARTING AND OPERATING M Tire Identification Number TIN Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on however the date code may only be on one side Tires the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the side of the tire date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two di its L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2
307. nd engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Inspect the CV joints Inspect exhaust system Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 510 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 78 000 Miles 130 000 km or 84 000 Miles 140 000 km or 84 Months Maintenance Service 78 Months Maintenance Schedule Service Schedule L Change the engine oil and engine oil filter 11 Change the engine oil and engine oil I Rotate tires filter L1 If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the Rotate tires engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary L1 Inspect the brake linings replace if necessary I Inspect the front suspension tie rod ends and boot seals replace if necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chry
308. ndicator Off ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator On JOUET 223 ee ee se ee EE Door Ajar CAE C bet Liftgate Ajar LOW Heke on ce eens oo 5a arr eared Low Tire Pressure HOTOIL Transmission Oil Temperature Above Normal Limits PASCAL uo etna doe gru Rond sans Fuel Cap Fault NOPUSE 1228s ander wa T3 eR CEP ots Fuse Fault CHAngE OIL Oil Change Required ESPOED 2 2o ph poo bees a ESP Deactivated ECO ECO ON Fuel Saver Indicator If Equipped The ECO ON indicator will illuminate when you are driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO ON depending on driving habits and vehicle usage Press the Odometer Trip Odometer ECO Fuel Saver Indicator button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings or the ECO display LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles HOTOIL Transmission Temperature Warning Message The HOTOIL cluster message will appear in the odom eter accompanied with a chime to indicate that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might oc cur with severe usage such as trailer towing It may also occur when operating the vehicle in a high torque converter slip condition such
309. ne Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter MOPAR Engine Oil Filter or equivalent Spark Plugs RE14PLP5 Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission If MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed Equipped ATF 4 product Manual Transmission If MOPAR Manual Transmission Lubricant or equivalent meeting the re Equipped quirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 9224 Transfer Case MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product Axle Differential Front MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent Axle Differential Rear 226 RBI Model 44 MOPAR Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 80W 90 API GL 5 or equivalent For trailer towing use MOPAR Synthetic Gear amp Axle Lubricant SAE 75W 140 or equivalent Models equipped with Trac Lok require an additive Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only recom mended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmis sion Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF 4 product MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS Mi
310. ne Parts 497 LEMON ERECTA a g ae 6 ees 497 GC Dass so fia gene APER eee BO bS NDS 13 498 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 8L 071105474 1 Integrated Power Module 7 Washer Fluid Reservoir 2 Battery 8 Engine Coolant Reservoir 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 9 Air Cleaner Filter 4 Engine Oil Fill 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 5 Engine Oil Dipstick 11 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Brake Fluid Reservoir 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ee ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION e Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and drivability The vehi
311. nel in the direction of the arrows TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Except REU Radio Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel MUSIC TYPE Button REU Radio Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from which you can make a selection Once a selection is made you can seek up or down or scan the channels and the radio will tune to the next station matching the selected format There is no time out for this screen Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the Music Type screen Once closed seek up seek down and scan will no longer be based on your selection SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to disp
312. ng maneuvers NOTE e Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are 366 STARTING AND OPERATING M apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface an
313. ng the assist strap and firmly lock the seat into position 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M MEDIEN Me rias b Removing the Rear Seat Two Door Models T WARNINCG e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and ES using a seat belt properly Subwoofer In a collision you or others in your vehicle could 2 Unplug the electrical connector from the rear sub be injured if seats are not properly latched to their woofer if equipped floor attachments Always be sure that the seats are fully latched 3 Fold the rear seat forward following steps 1 through 3 under Fold and Tumble Rear Seat in this section 1 Remove the three rear subwoofer if equipped mounting nuts using a 15 mm socket ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 4 Press down on the release bar on each side and pull Replacing the Rear Seat Two Door Models the seat out and away from the lower bracket Reverse the steps for removing the seat WARNING 5 Remove the seat from the vehicle e To help protect against personal injury passengers should not be seated in the rear cargo area with the rear seat folde
314. nged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasoline blended with MMT offers no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT has shown to reduce sparkplug life and reduce emission system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indi cated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer if the gasoline contains MMT 410 STARTING AND OPERATING xe It is even more important to look for gasoline without Fuel System Cautions MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States CAUTION MMT is prohibited in Federal and California Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s reformulated gasoline performance Materials Added To Fuel e The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Fed All gasoline sold in the United States is required to eral law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine contain effective detergent additives Use of additional performance and damage the emission control detergents or other additives are not needed under system mE normal conditions and would result in additional cost An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition Therefore you should not have to add a
315. nitoring Sensor Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire side wall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes ee STARTING AND OPERATING 397 Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Incr
316. not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 7 Check for leaks Release the parking brake NOTE To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make certain that the dipstick cap is properly reseated It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Manual Transmission The clutch hydraulic system is a sealed maintenance free system In the event of leakage or other malfunction the system must be replaced Manual Transmission If Equipped Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended manual trans mission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further
317. not be blocked with metal objects 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie To Unlock the Doors and Swing Gate Press and release the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button once to unlock the driver s door only or twice to unlock all the doors and swing gate When the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed the Illuminated Entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash twice The system can be programmed to unlock all the doors upon the first RKE transmitter UNLOCK button press using the following procedure 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter 2 Continue to hold the RKE transmitter LOCK button for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test this feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE trans mitter NOTE Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are inside of the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock the Doors and Swing Gate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signals will flas
318. nstrument panel above the glove compartment The letters SRS are embossed on the airbag covers 022609112 Driver Airbag 2 Passenger Airbag 3 Knee Bolster NOTE These airbags are certified to the new Federal regulations for Advanced Airbags EN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator design This allows the airbag to have different rates of inflation that are based on the severity and type of collision If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags they are located inside the driver and front passenger seats and their covers are also labeled SRS s T EE A ee Side Airbag Location NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during airbag deployment 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNINCG e No objects should be placed over or near the WARNING Continued e If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags do airbag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate Do not put anything on or around the front airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured because the airbags may no longer be functional These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflat ing If your vehicle is equipped w
319. nt rearward and downward into the seat removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer s instruc tions 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNINCG Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor to secure a Child Restraint System CRS These types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into the retractor For additional information on ALR refer to Automatic Locking Mode description under Seat Belts in Passenger Seating Posi tions section The chart below defines the seating posi tions with an Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate Left Center Right CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock _ ALR FirstRow o ooo o o ThiraRow Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR 1 To install a child restraint with ALR first pull enough of the seat belt
320. nterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers ee b UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE
321. nty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents 524 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ie We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In the 50 United States and Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a cra
322. nu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application For example if you are in the disc menu and you are listening to FM radio you can speak commands from the disc menu or from the FM radio menu When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low At any point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Command amp vR button and say Help or Main Menu ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Commands The Voice Command system understands two types of commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is active Changing the Volume 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command AVR button 2 Say a command e g Help 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio system Main Menu Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command vR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu In this mode you can say the following commands
323. ny longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed If you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic inspect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat
324. ny part of the brakes may cause e nspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as f A P excessive wear or unpredictable braking You might required not have full braking power when you need it to e Check threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on prevent an accident If you have been operating your the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus vehicle in dirty conditions get your brakes checked pension Retighten them if required and torque to the and cleaned as necessary values specified in the Service Manual e f you experience unusual vibration after driving in mud slush or similar conditions check the wheels for impacted material Impacted material can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will correct the situation e Check for accumulations of plants or brush These things could be a fire hazard They might hide damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parki
325. nything to the malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to fuel overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 411 CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e The use of fuel additives which are now being WARNING sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the systems can result in civil penalties being assessed engine running for an extended period If the against you vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle Continued 412 STARTING AND OPERATING See WARNING Continued e Guard against carbon monoxide with pr
326. o Frequencies as the TPM Sensors 406 STARTING AND OPERATING M 2 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals 3 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors NOTE e If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it has a tire pressure monitoring sensor and can be monitored by the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS In the event that the matching full size spare tire is swapped with a low pressure road tire the next ignition key cycle will still show the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be ON and a chime to sound Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h will turn OFF the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light as long as none of the road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold e If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly it does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h
327. o o ANT Universal Ga NNNM CNN rage Door Opener 20 Amp Power Outlet 1 Rain UGDO Vanity Lamp Yellow Sensor VANITY LP 20 Amp Power Outlet 2 Ignition Off Draw Yellow BATT ACC SELECT IOD HVAC ATC MW 20 Amp Front Heated Seat SENSR Underhood Yellow Lamp UH LMP 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cavity mei x Ps Mini Description Fuse Fuse mei x Ps Fuse M12 30 Amp Amplifier AMP 20 Amp COL MOD IR SNS Green Yellow Heater Ventilation Air M13 20 Amp Ignition Off Draw Conditioning Yellow Cabin Compartment Automatic Temperature Node IOD CCN Wire Control HVAC ATC less Control Module Rear View Mirror RR WCM SIREN Multi VW MIR Cabin Com function Control Switch partment Node CCN MULTIFCTN SW Transfer Case Switch T CASE SW RUN ST Multi Function Control Switch MULTIFTCN SW Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Glow Plug Module GLW PLG MOD Export Diesel Only 20 Amp Trailer Tow Export Yellow _ Only MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 Cavity Cartridge Mini Description Cartridge Mini Description Fus Fuse Fuse M16 0 Amp Occupant Restraint 10 Amp Right Horn RT HORN Red Controller ORC Red HI LOW 7 15 Amp Left Tail License Park 10 Amp Left Horn LT HORN Blue Lamp LT TAIL LIC Red HI LOW PRK LMP 25 Amp Rear Wiper REAR 8 Natural 1 1 15 Amp Right Tail Park Run WIPER Blue Lamp RI TAIL PRK 20 Amp Fuel Pump
328. o the left or right to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the engine NOTE A key that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the Vehicle Security Light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in t
329. odular Hard Top E Manual Transmission a00 see eee epee wad 144 a di o To Accelerate For Passing 24e Rhe as 145 D Front Panel s Removal 157 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M O Freedom Top Storage Bag esee RE RS 159 D Quick Steps To Lowering The Soft Top 179 O Front Panel s Installation cou eeacd as 163 D Quick Steps To Raising The Soft Top 181 O Front Panel s Installation With Rear Hard O Lowering Ihe Soft Top 42 emm Rees 184 Top Removed gt ci sisse 10 GRaising The Soft Top 000 00 eee 192 H Rear Hard Top Removal ip ll Soft Top Four Door Models 201 O Rear Hard Top Installation 167 O Quick Steps For Lowering The Soft Top 204 E Door Frame 64444446544 EIER ERSP TRES 168 O Quick Steps For Raising The Soft Top 207 O Door Frame Removal Two Door Models 168 3 Folding Down The Soft Top 210 O S NE 7 MA EM Dn O Putting Up The Soft Top 219 D Door Frame Removal Four Door Models 172 ene ee oe eee cs ee O Opening The Sunrider 229 O Door Frame Installation Four Door MOGGIS ees fieeeddas sees tuge te SERRE 174 EClose Ihe SUnde sepvacudecedee es 231 ll Soft Top Two Door Models 177 WiSunrider Four Door Models If Equipped 231 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 E Openme The Sunrider s s qs TRES 232 O Raising The Windshield And R
330. ogrammed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Customer Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat
331. ome on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 3 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 4 Low Fuel Warning Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 8 gal 10 6L this light will turn on and a single chime will sound 5 Speedometer Indicates vehicle speed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 6 Front Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped Indicates when the front axle lock has been FRONT Q activated 7 Seat Belt Reminder Light A warning chime and an indicator light will alert you to buckle the seat belts When the belt is buckled the chime will stop but the light will stay on for about six seconds until it times out Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Start ing Your Vehicle for further information 8 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrows will flash with the exterior turn signals when the turn signal lever is operated A tone will chime
332. ompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area e f supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the amp button and say Setup followed by Emergency ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your NOTE chances of successfully making a phone call as to that e The towing assistance nu
333. onnect Phone paired cellular phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the VR button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the Uconnect Phone and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a Uconnect Phone paired cellular phone and the Uconnect Phone follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User s Manual List Paired Cellular Phone Names e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones e The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the amp vr button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sec tions for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say 3 o Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the
334. ont of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents ee STARTING AND OPERATING 423 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The trailer tongue weight e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or authorized dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire Safety Information Tire and Loading Information Placard in Starting and Op erating for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive train components the following guidelines are recom mended NOTE Trailer towing requires special rear axle lubri cant Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for the correct fluid type 424 STARTING AND OPERATING M CAUTION WARNING Continued e
335. ontrol Lever 152 New Vehicle Break In Period 75 Occupant Restrdints x seeren aada apara gees 97 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 407 Odometer s sans ak ee Es ARS URN 42 45e X38 R3 Wd 256 THD sa86 66566450404 9684 R65 655 455 254 256 Off Pavement Driving Off Road 052 Off Road Driving Off Pavement 952 CILE Danse dicato 24 e sop 9 teas oa i eny 258 Oil Change Indicator Reset sisse 258 giu P 456 apace aeree 93 995 3 ie geese eee RR SOROR 496 bao C S 456 lu JA 458 Iden fieaBon LOBO cux du pb iot RERO ex 457 Materials Added to llle 458 Pressure Wartung Light 23 24 e 60904 249 540 Recommendation cess 457 496 VISCOSHUY neos hab ieri hos e SR REPE 458 496 Oilressune LIONG sigrag 24993 REIS PP 249 Onboard Diagnostic System 452 453 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 6 Outside Rearview Mirrors 85 Overheating Engine 42s sre oe seas 253 436 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 6 525 lude T Cr 478 Pampas uoa 5 Sa ey 6 Peer Bt ee 478 Fame ele cuichecvaes 437648464844 EE 21 Perks Bike secare 930 EORR EUR GEORG a X eas 366 Fosse Tae DE uuu Spe ree yer er 135 74 Phone CelluldB 223939 42 72 2225 688 oe Be E 95 86 Phone Hands Free Uconnect
336. oper maintenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnor mal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open Keep the swing gate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is located on the driver s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is the correct one for this vehicle Fuel Filler Cap ee STARTING AND OPERATING 413 CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and will cause the MIL to turn on e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel cap gas cap A poorly fitting cap could let impu rities into the fuel system Also a poorly fitting A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling aftermarket cap can cause the Malfunction Indi cator Light MIL to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system e To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel WARNING tank is
337. or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light Once vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph 22 km h the system will once again attempt to return to off road mode Sway Bar Switch Press the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system Press the switch again to deactivate the system The Sway Bar Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster will illuminate when the bar is disconnected The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash during activation transition or ee STARTING AND OPERATING 351 To disconnect the stabilizer sway bar shift to either 4H or 4L and press the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the off road position Refer to Four Wheel Drive Operation in Starting and Operating for further information The Sway Bar Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer sway bar has been fully disconnected NOTE The stabilizer sway bar may be torque locked due to left and right suspension height differences This condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading In order for the stabilizer sway bar to disconnect reconnect the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned This alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side to side To return to on road mode press the SWAY BAR switch again WARNING If the stabilizer sway bar will not return to on road mode vehicle stability is greatly reduced Do not attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph 29 km h
338. orage Compartment The rear storage compartment cover is held by a spring loaded latch In order to remove the rear storage com partment cover use the following procedure NOTE Therearstorage compartment latch should not be used as cargo tie down 1 Flip up the pull loop so it is perpendicular straight up to the top surface of the tray 2 Pull up on the loop and twist it 90 degrees so it is parallel to the slotted hole in the tray 3 Open the rear compartment cover Rear Storage Cover DUAL TOP IF EQUIPPED If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top you must remove one of the tops from the vehicle If the soft top is removed the pivot brackets must also be removed from the sport bar The soft top was installed at the factory for shipping purposes only The soft top and the eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 hard top are to be used independently Removal is e Two rear swing gate brackets mandatory to prevent any possible wear and tear on the soft top Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage resulting from both tops remaining on the vehicle at the same time for extended periods of time 2 Remove the hard top Refer to Freedom Top Three Piece Modular Hard Top Front Rear Panel Removal in this section 3 Remove the soft top bow assembly pivot bracket screws two per side using a 130 Torx head driver Removing the Soft Top 1 Locate and remove the two boxes that contain the
339. oring TPMS 254 Tu sp bao eee ruda eni 78 134 249 494 495 uc foe REGG ee He tHE tH EEE Roh ees 248 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 248 Loading Vehicle 44 26 aus t m SOROR eae SCORE 414 oo hese soe et eee eee ee wees oo oe eae 390 Lacko ONE uos sa dea PE e ase ochs eae ges 348 349 Locks LOO iex eose reri rrena PESE ERRORS 30 lower DOO 3 2 x ed topi de 93 38 ea RP oo de ger d 31 vic WIES PTT 13 Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren CAICH 26264 6e45 au 68s ases EROR RES 67 69 IEURHCANON BOdY uxacne de mrdcdr aoe ee e os 461 A INDEX 539 Maintenance Free battery 4 eiceess eke asus 459 Maintenance Procedures sen 455 Maintenance Schedule 500 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 259 453 Manual Service zu ausu uere 2 akahe x x ELA S bs 525 Manual Transmission 333 475 Fluid Level Check 2 ta ves 476 Lubricant Selection rsen 475 Shift Deeds fe ausaceovatetueaue HORE ae 334 Master Cylinder Brakes a4 oes de 6rd mires 471 Mitte Dp DIN HEISE 46 Gees 999 Gs oe deep 262 263 NUS 4 be 45 aw RE ee Eucherdoboo Rd Ee UE RA 84 Outside eee es 85 INGOUVIOW lt 4 5 3 bebo oe 43 RARE ehh eee 84 run AM 66 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 8 Modular Hard TOP i345 sx XR epe 156 Monitor Tire Pressure System 402 Mopar Edis 4a2 6 2640065 44 6 6495 RETE 454 524 Multi Function C
340. orner completely unzip the window NOTE When releasing the sail panel retainers it is 036007477 helpful to pull down on the rear roof bow 8 Once unzipped remove the side window retainers from the door channel and body side channel Repeat this step on the opposite side ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215 10 Fold the sail panels so that they rest on top of the soft 11 The swing gate brackets do not need to be removed top unless the hard top is being installed To remove the swing gate brackets pull the front of the bracket forward while rolling the entire bracket back in toward the vehicle to disengage 216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 12 Grasp the front side bow behind the header and lift 13 Fold back the front section of the top pulling the the top fabric rearward Gently rest the header on top of the rear portion of the deck UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217 14 Fold the top so that the material forms a W as 15 Release the side bows by pressing down on the latch shown Enter the vehicle and move the material into two above the front of the rear door Push the top rearward to folds disengage Repeat this step on the other side 218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 16 Before lowering the top open the swing gate to NOTE Help from another person will ease this opera prevent possible damage to the rear center high mounted tion brak
341. oroughly with cold water then wipe with a soft and slightly moist clean cloth 4 When removing frost snow or ice never use a scraper or de icing chemicals Use warm water only if you must clean the window quickly 5 Debris sand mud dirt dust or salt from off road driving will have a major impact on zipper operation Even normal on road driving and vehicle washing will eventually impact window zipper operation To maintain ease of use of the window zippers each window zipper should be cleaned and lubricated regularly Use MO PAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equiva lent to ease zipper operation Before applying make sure the zipper teeth are clear of sand mud and other materials Clean both sides of the zipper not just one side Rinse both zipper halves with fresh water and allow to dry Aggressively work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper teeth eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 If a stuck zipper slide is experienced work the MOPAR Soft Top Zipper Cleaner and Lubricant or equivalent into the zipper slide Several applications may be required before the zipper comes free 6 Never paste stickers gummed labels or any tape to the windows Adhesives are hard to remove and may dam age the windows FUSES Totally Integrated Power Module The Totally Integrated Power Module TIPM is located in the engine compartment near the battery This center contains cartri
342. osition 2 Push the ignition key inward 3 Turn the ignition key to the LOCK position and remove the Key WARNINCG Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is danger ous for a number of reasons A child or others could be injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key STEERING WHEEL LOCK Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved approximately a half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel With the engine running rotate the steering wheel one half revolution from the straight ahead position turn off 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie the engine and remove the key Rotate the steering wheel slightly in both directions until the lock engages To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition and turn the wheel slightly t
343. ottom edge of the oil fill hole Adding Fluid Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the level specified above Selection of Lubricant Use only manufacturer s recommended fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Maintenance After Off Road Driving After extended operation in mud sand or water or similar dirty conditions have your brake drums brake linings and axle joints inspected and cleaned as soon as possible This will prevent any abrasive material from causing excessive wear or unpredictable braking action Following off road usage completely inspect the under body of your vehicle Check the tires body structure steering suspension and exhaust system for damage Check the threaded fasteners for looseness particularly on the chassis drivetrain components steering and sus pension Retighten if required to torque values specified in the Service Manual Also check for accumulations of vegetation or brush that could become a fire hazard or 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M conceal damage to fuel lines brake hoses axle pinion seals and propeller shafts Check the air conditioning drain tube on the lower dash wall in the engine compart ment for mud or debris and clean as required A plugged tube will adversely affect air conditioning performance CAUTION Under frequent heavy duty driving conditions change all lubricants
344. our absence the horn will sound three times when you unlock the doors Check the vehicle for tampering The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm unexpectedly If you remain in the vehicle and lock the doors with the RKE transmitter once the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed after 16 seconds when you pull the door handle to exit the alarm will sound If this occurs press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm You may also accidentally disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm by unlocking the driver s door with the key and then locking it The door will be locked but the Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 ILLUMINATED ENTRY The interior lights will come on when you open any door The lights will remain on after all of the doors are closed and then fade to off or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned on REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors swing gate and activate the Panic Alarm from a maxi mum distance of 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system 020205844 Three Button RKE Transmitter 1 Lock 2 Unlock NOTE The line of transmission must
345. over which is located on the PRNDL bezel above the PARK position 4 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 5 Using the screwdriver reach into the manual override opening Press and hold the shift lock lever down Kun Brake Transmission Interlock Manual Override 6 Press the shifter release button and shift into NEU TRAL 7 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL Have your vehicle inspected by your local authorized dealer if the shift lock manual override has been used ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 Automatic Transmission with Overdrive Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE or from P or R to D should be done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake when moving the shift lever between these gears Shift Lever Gear Ranges NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 10 F 23 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only second gear operation Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL position into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first
346. peed Control Cruise Control lt 2 cscs seen s 142 PPCCCOIMICIEN acsi 4544ido Hens desde PT G48 6 d 248 EEEELLIIIILLUGIIIIULUIIUUIIIILIIILILIILLIDiILIALEO LIoLIGH LULOLU LPOPeoeUd A A LLLLLILULILO L CL CtLDLU5GTBLLPOEEB HBOA AGU L LLL P1 GSCeEeR LOOIOoLAOLDLAAe o oELULNIN 2 2 0087 C Dit ta oh aoe ess ne oy oe TE ETETETT EEE 329 Automatic Transmission sn 330 Cold Weather ou xs 458 ux eia d pee 330 Eneige Block Halet 2 rescue tb obe eea 992 Engine Fails to Start 2 25 2 dote aoa ardet Coke hs 331 Manual Transmission leen 929 Iu CL IT 24 Steering l OWBP carapo eraoro e dvd See vee oe 365 TP COMM 224s 2 2euwere y wes ce eee 141 dis APP rr 13 Wheel TIE 2242599293254 2 255 2295 141 cerro M M r 149 491 Storage Behind the Seat iu decreta Ed 3 150 PlOlgee VENICE aeiaai me ge p Rao gk E Arti 323 491 Dione XOU Voce duced S clans awed eee sas 491 OUNTE 22656654 EAR CRI RUE E Ed ES 228 231 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 50 Sway Bar Disconnect Electronic 349 Swine Gate ROOF s scs op oc 654854552505 eo HS 36 System Remote Staring 4 444 445 456 5550 Hard 24 Tac NOMEE perereca rer en oe HE oak Ge oe es 252 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 253 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 67 Thet System Arming 2 sac os ebos 285 tirarai 18 Theft System Disarming cease m Ru REESE 18 Tt Ies COMIN seveteouedcers acess e
347. plied to the slipping wheel s to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ee system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in either the Partial Off or Full Off modes Refer to ESP Electronic Stability Program in this section Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the anti lock brake system ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated WARNING The Brake Assist System BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded b
348. proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any condition is present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its function Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the rear window washer if equipped is shared The fluid re
349. quite different Please take a moment to activate the Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm to hear the differences in the horn In case one should go off in the future you will need to know which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE i To Set the Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to lock the doors and swing gate or when you use the power door lock switch while the door is open After all the doors are locked and closed the Vehicle Security Light located on the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for about 16 sec onds to signal that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this 16 second arming period opening any door or the swing gate will cancel the arming If the Vehicle Security Alarm successfully arms the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate the Vehicle Security Alarm is set To Disarm the System To disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm you will need to press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or turn the ignition key to the ON position If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in y
350. rd 90 degrees 035707391 NOTE The front panel s must be positioned properly to ensure sealing Set the panels on the windshield frame so that there is no overhang Also make sure that the panels are sitting flush with the body 2 Install the right panel first then the left panel 3 Reinstall the panel s using the same steps for removal in reverse order Rear Hard Top Removal 1 Remove both front panels Refer to Front Panel s Removal in this section 2 Open both doors 3 Remove the two Torx head screws that secure the hard top at the B pillar near the top of the door using a 40 Torx head driver Four Door Only eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 4 Remove the six Torx head screws that secure the hard 6 Locate the wire harness on the left rear inside corner of top to the vehicle along the interior bodyside using a the vehicle 40 Torx head driver 5 Open the swing gate all the way to ensure clearance of the rear window glass Lift the rear window glass 035707355 81947257 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 7 Release the red locking tab by pushing upward 035707357 035707356 NOTE If necessary pliers can be used to lightly squeeze 8 To remove the wiring harness press the side tab and grips while disconnecting the washer hose pull to disconnect ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 9 To remove the washer hose
351. rd Warning This is an emergency warning system and should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways slow down e In city traffic while stopped shift transmission into NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the temperature gauge reads HOT H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on HOT H and you hear continuous chimes turn the engine off immediately and call for service en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down WARNING an impending overheat condition You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time e If your air
352. re below the freezing point another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster electrolyte in a discharged battery may freeze Do not pack Jump starting can be dangerous if done improperly attempt jump starting because the battery could rup so please follow the procedures in this section carefully ture or explode and cause personal injury Battery temperature must be brought above freezing point before attempting a jump start NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Preparations for Jump Start WARNING The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment behind the left headlight assembly e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when z o _ ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the 9 ignition switch is on You can be injured by moving fan blades Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from
353. re potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm Some air fresheners will damage the finish of painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly contact any surface Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric defrosters Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may scratch the elements When cleaning the rearview mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage will also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the vehicl
354. re when washing the inside of the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth For an additional five minutes of operation press the and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to button a second time the heating elements Labels can be peeled off NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear after soaking with warm water window defroster only when the engine is operating Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abra sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window e Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS W Instrument Panel Features Mi Instrument Cluster 204 Mi Instrument Cluster Descriptions ll Compass And Trip Computer If Equipped EI COMO DONOMS ue cadet werde 6 cie cheeses EMT CONCIMONS a3 299 9 9543 IRSRERS ES HO Compass Temperature Display ll Media Center 230 REQ AM FM Stereo Radio And 6 Disc CD DVD Changer MP3 WMA AUX Jack suse mn 263 D Operating Instructions Radio Mode D Operation Instructions Disc Mode For CD And MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD Video 33 44444 qaod deg aer x3 3 o Notes On Playing MP3 WMA Files D List Button Disc Mode For MP3 WMA Play iua Ree et ex REE
355. refer to Tires General Infor brake controller is not required mation in Starting and Operating for proper tire Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over replacement procedures Replacing tires with a higher 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle s 2 000 Ibs 907 Kg GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury ee STARTING AND OPERATING 427 CAUTION WARNING Continued If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg Towing any trailer will increase your stopping loaded it should have its own brakes and they distance When towing you should allow for ad ditional space between your vehicle and the ve hicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights and Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 5 stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety e Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hydraulic brake lines It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail You m
356. ribution as identified by the symbols 81915f2a Panel gt gt Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level ugh Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demist outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Pe Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319 cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Q7 Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost even if the fan switch is not in the A C position This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary 320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Blower Control Temperature Control oru ra i iui 7 81cab3
357. right side of the window 228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 20 Close the header latches and return the sun visors to SUNRIDER TWO DOOR MODELS IF their secured position EQUIPPED CAUTION Operating the top opening a door or lowering a window while the top is wet may allow water to drip into the vehicle s interior NOTE If you are going to be driving faster than 40 mph 64 km h with the Sunrider feature open it is recom mended that you remove the rear window of the vehicle eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229 Opening the Sunrider 3 Slide the plastic sleeve forward 1 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 2 Release the header latches from the loops windshield frame 230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 4 Grasp the header and lift the top back Make sure the 5 Locate the straps to secure the side bows Wrap the material is folded back as shown straps around the bows as shown Repeat on the other NOTE The Sunrider latch on the door rail should not ue be activated for Sunrider use If activated the soft top must be reinstalled starting from the sail panels 036107475 6 Reposition the sun visors ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231 Closing the Sunrider 1 Remove the straps from the side bows 2 Unclip and move the sun visors to the side 3 Grasp the front header and pull it to the front of the vehicle
358. rized dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat positions the shoulder belt anchorage can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push in on the anchorage near your outside shoulder and slide it up or down to reach the position that serves you best ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt WARNING Position the shoulder belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Restraints Using 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE the Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraint section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position lef Center
359. rking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS IN Mirrors 4 ene Gare dee stp ROUGE TUE on SG pipe 84 H Inside Day Night Mirror 84 pIOUISIde MUTO 25222 dco on eee ex edu ae 85 EL Vanity MITOS 64 94 9494 52405804 ERES eo 86 ll Uconnect Phone If Equipped 86 ADEO 24444552655 55452605405 5534 88 O Phone Call Features lt 5 ic cctneeeooen seti 96 O Uconnect Phone Features s esce e 29 H Advanced Phone Connectivity 104 H Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone O General Information ll Voice Command If Equipped H Voice Command System Operation O Commands O Voice Training li Seats D Front Seat Adjustment 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M O Manual Seat Height Adjustment aM LISDES ous Ew ee er ee ee ee ee 132 M LR LE es O Multit ncton LeVer uus e vary dew spe dii 132 O Front Seatback Recline sss ese ssns rrasa 122 4 Headlights And Parking Lights 133 uc a 123 VT Signals 4 6434 SERERE Y ed bud R3 134 arad Pestana 124 Eliane Change Assist sse 5542554605408 24 134 O Fold And Tumble Rear Seat Two Door ALEON Reminder 1 31223 sina b Er aa 4 135 MOCCIS sce Goud 448 Hoe uer E RC dor ee UR 126 o High Low Beam S
360. rors are located on the sun visors To use the mirrors rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward E Vanity Mirror Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is transmitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 e WWw jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile cellular phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a doc
361. rted by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this display e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension e Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or
362. ruc fabric The vinyl will stretch back to its original size and tional videos the top can then be installed If the temperature is 41 F 5 C or below do not attempt to put the top down or CAUTION roll the rear or side curtains CAUTION e Do not run a fabric top through an automatic car wash Window scratches and wax build up may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunt ing or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow etc below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not move your vehicle until the top has been If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top either fully attached to the windshield frame or has been folded down for a period of time the top will fully lowered appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Do not lower the top with the windows installed Window and top damage may occur Continued 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued WARNING Continued e Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models e The fabric upper doors and fabric top are designed in
363. rward by lifting the lever Release the lever when the seat is in the desired position Using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to make sure that the latch is fully engaged ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Only adjust a seat while the vehicle is parked 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Manual Seat Height Adjustment If Equipped Front Seatback Recline The driver s seat height can be raised or lowered by using Lean forward before lifting the handle then lean back to the ratcheting handle located on the outboard side of the the desired position and release the handle Lift the seat Pull upward on the handle to raise the seat push handle to return the seatback to an upright position downward on the handle to lower the seat 030207408 5 eg 030907408 Recline Lever Seat Height Adjustment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 WARNING Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seatbelt and be seriously or fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Front Easy Entry Seats Two Door Models Push the lever on
364. s headlights headlight beam selection passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The lever is located on the left side of the steering column UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 Headlights and Parking Lights NOTE Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent e Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric for parking lights and instrument panel lights Turn to conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric the second detent for headlight operation conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process e f the driver s door is left open and the headlights or parking lights are left on the High Beam Indicator Light will remain illuminated and a chime will sound 031407548 Headlight Switch 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Turn Signals NOTE Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows If either light remains on and does not flash or there is on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective e A tone will chime if the turn signals are left on for more than 1 mile 2 km Lane Change Assist Tap the l
365. s proper position NOTE If the rear seatback is not fully latched the center shoulder belt will not be able to be extended for use If you cannot extend the center shoulder belt make sure your seatback is fully latched WARNINCG Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and or passengers An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD Release both the hood latches 81abdfOf Hood Latch Raise the hood and locate the safety latch located in the middle of the hood opening Push the latch to the left side of the vehicle to open the hood You may have to push down slightly on the hood before pushing the safety latch Insert the support rod into the slot on the hood 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To close the hood remove the support rod from the hood panel and place it in the retaining clip Lower the hood slowly Secure both of the hood latches WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031407547 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking light
366. s satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REQ RES Radios With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen ESN SID Access With REN RER RBZ Radios While in SAT mode press the MENU button on the ra
367. s while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle This kind of hitch is the most popular on the market today and is commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars It is typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturers directions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights IW and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration loading to comply with Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR requirements ee STARTING AND OPERATING 419 WARNING e An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling stability braking performance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Hitch Systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers Consult with your
368. se of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING RMy METHOD Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experience these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before consid ering service for the vehicle 408 STARTING AND OPERATING M Over 40 auto manufacturer s worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC to define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso line Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro vide excellent performance and durability for the engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gaso
369. sed on severity and type of collision Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the WARNING Continued inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times e Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Lap Shoulder Belts belts All seating positions in your vehicle have combination lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is de signed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This fea
370. seness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios eee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Use extreme care not to damage the seal or internal components aaa aerate arena aa a AAAS T A MR n Pa Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 81182c72 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw e Hazard switch off reinstall and tighten the screw until snug e Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve Battery at an acceptable charge level niently from outside the vehicle while still e RKE PANIC button not pressed mainta
371. servoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only not radiator anti freeze When refilling the washer fluid reservoir take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades this will help blade perfor mance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercial windshield washer solvents are flam mable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri cation or oil
372. sfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left ee STARTING AND OPERATING 395 Economy Tire Inflation Pressures Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Placard Location Two Door Models 396 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Placard Location Four Door Models Tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Mo
373. sh or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 525 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administrator NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NO
374. sition or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate protect you in a collision If the light does not come on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked immediately The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning er Light for six to eight seconds for a self check N when the ignition is first turned on After the e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Airbags Different airbag inflation rates are possible based on the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 size The bags fully inflate in about
375. sler Dealer ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 511 90 000 Miles 150 000 km or 90 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary T Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following trailer towing snow plowing heavy loading taxi police delivery service commercial service off road desert operation or more than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Inspect the transfer case fluid Inspect the front amp rear axle fluid change if using your vehicle for police taxi fleet off road or frequent trailer towing Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 512 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M 96 000 Miles 160 000 km or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102 000 Miles 170 000 km or Schedule 102 Months Maintenance Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Service Schedule l Rotate tires LJ Change the engine oil and engine oil _J If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the filter engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary L Rotate tires Inspect the brake linings replace if nec
376. st The key to any crossing is low and slow Shift into first gear manual transmission or DRIVE auto matic transmission with the transfer case in the 4L Low position and proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed 3 to 5 mph 5 to 8 km h maximum and light throttle Keep the vehicle moving do not try to accelerate through the crossing After crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion 362 STARTING AND OPERATINC ee CAUTION e Water ingestion into the axles transmission trans fer case engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too fast or through too deep of water Water can cause permanent damage to engine driveline or other vehicle components and your brakes will be less effective once wet and or muddy This vehicle is capable of crossing through water at a depth of 30 inches 76 cm at speeds no greater than 5 mph 8 km h Water ingestion can occur causing damage to your vehicle Before You Cross Any Type of Water As you approach any type of water you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly If necessary get out and walk through the water or probe it with a stick You need to be sure of its depth approach angle current and bottom condition Be careful of murky or muddy waters check for hidden obstacles Make sure you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can recover
377. st be removed before removing right panel 1 Fold down the sun visor and move it to the side 2 Turn the rear fasteners knobs located on the over head speaker bar assembly counterclockwise until they can be removed 09570735 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ee 3 Turn the center L shaped locks two from the center 4 Turn the rear L shaped lock located above the shoul of the roof panel der belt anchorage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 5 Unlatch the header panel latch located at the top of the Freedom Top Storage Bag windshield Your vehicle comes with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows you to store your Freedom Top panels The storage bag contains two compartments and fits behind the rear seat Lay the Freedom bag down so the loops and hooks are facing downward Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap Release the Velcro on the black panel divider and fold it back NOTE Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is closed prior to inserting the panel into the Freedom bag 035707353 6 Remove the left hand panel To remove the right panel follow the steps above except for Step 3 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Insert the right side Freedom panel into the bag with the Unfold the black panel divider ensure the divider is latches facing downward laying flat Secure the Velcro located at the center of the divider 0357079
378. stribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 12 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light After the ignition is turned on the Anti Lock Brake System ABS light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle start up If the light remains on after start up or comes on and stays on at road speeds it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative The system reverts to standard non anti lock brakes If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on see an authorized dealer immediately Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting And Operat JJ ing 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION 13 Airbag Warning Light This indicator ligh
379. t of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed Take care not to overspeed the engine Proper operation of four wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size type and circumference on each wheel Any difference will adversely affect shifting and cause damage to the transfer case Because four wheel drive provides improved traction there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds Do not go faster than road conditions permit ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the N Neutral position without first fully engaging the parking brake The transfer case N Neutral position disengages both the front and rear driveshaft from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move regardless of the transmission position The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle Shift Positions For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position see the information below 2H Position This range is used for normal street and highway driving on hard surfaced roads 4H Position This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This range 4H provides additional traction for loose slippery road surfaces and should not be used on wet or dry pavement The 4WD Indicator Light locat
380. t speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph 40 km h To Vary the Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing up and holding the RESUME ACCEL lever If the lever is continually held in the RESUME ACCEL position the set speed will continue to increase until the lever is released then the new set speed will be established Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed increase Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph 4 8 km h etc To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is set push down and hold the SET DECEL lever If the lever is continually held in the SET DECEL position the set speed will continue to decrease until the lever is released Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new set speed will be established Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 1 6 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases Manual Transmission Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic Speed Control A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disen
381. t the Flash Lights With Lock feature outside of the vehicle by pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie NOTE Pressing the RKE transmitter LOCK button while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button to deactivate the Ve hicle Security Alarm The Flash Lights With Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with RS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 Weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of battery is five years 2 Clo
382. te nd am Electronic Volume Control 6 DISC MP3 WMA The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it E S L1 When the audio system is turned ON the sound will be pets fe e e se e j set at the same volume level as last played 042005200 SEEK Buttons REO Radio Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect message will display on the radio screen Phone
383. technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 522 This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e f for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE C e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 ee F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 523 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation
384. tended to be driven in the 2H e 4H Four wheel drive high range position for normal street and highway conditions such as hard surfaced roads e N Neutral e 2H Two wheel drive high range 344 STARTING AND OPERATING xe In the event that additional traction is required the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed This is accom plished by simply moving the shift lever to one of these positions The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose slippery road surfaces only and not intended for normal driving Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on hard surfaced roads will cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components The 4WD Indicator Light located in the instrument cluster alerts the driver that the vehicle is in four wheel drive and the front and rear driveshafts are locked together The light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into the 4H position NOTE Do not attempt to shift when only the front or rear wheels are spinning The transfer case is not equipped with a synchronizer and the front and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for a shift to take place Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are spinning can cause damage to the transfer case When operating your vehicle in 4L the engine speed will be approximately three times four times for Rubicon models tha
385. th the engine off and vehicle in PARK auto matic transmission or NEUTRAL with clutch out manual transmission with wheels straight Apply park ing brake on manual transmission vehicle 2 Start the engine 3 6 STARTING AND OPERATING ee 3 With the engine running the brake applied and the clutch out rotate the steering wheel 180 counterclock wise from center 4 Press the ESP OFF switch four times within twenty seconds Rotate the steering wheel 360 clockwise 180 clock wise from center 6 Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON 7 If the sequence was completed properly the ESP TCS Indicator Light will blink several times to confirm HSA is off Steps 1 7 must be completed within 90 seconds to turn off HSA Repeat steps 1 7 to re enable HSA functionality Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift it applies the appropriate brake and may reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur ERM will only intervene during very severe or evasive driving maneu Vers Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers It cannot prevent wheel lift due to other f
386. the Soft Top Refer to Lowering the Soft Top in this section for further information 1 Remove the side and back windows 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Release header latches from the windshield frame 3 Release the Sunrider latch both sides 81c65d28 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 4 Open the swing gate and lower the top 1 Open the swing gate and raise the top engaging the Sunrider latches another person may be needed to help with this operation NOTE Ensure fabric does not overhang the sides of the vehicle Quick Steps to Raising the Soft Top Refer to Raising the Soft Top in this section for further information 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE gt Ff 2 Engage header latches 035907427 81925914 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 3 Install rear corner panels 4 Install side and back windows 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Lowering The Soft Top ndow Quarter Wi 7 Check Strap 6 1 Header Bow 2 2 Bow 3 3 Bow 4 Sail Panel 8 Front Retainer Quarter Window 9 Bottom Retainer Quarter Window 5 Body Side Retainer eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 UE ai Dd 1 Zipper Start h 3 Swing Gate Bar Inis 2 Zipper F 4 Swing Gate Brackets 5 Sail Panels 186 UNDERSTANDING T
387. the arrow pointing upward is displayed Io move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing downward is displayed 5 To save the new time setting touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Changing Daylight Savings Time When selected this feature will display the time of day in daylight savings time Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Daylight Savings Touch the screen where the words Daylight Savings are dis played to change the current setting Show Time if Radio is Off When selected this feature will display the time of day on the touch screen when the radio is turned off Proceed as follows to change the current setting 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 When this feature is on a check mark will appear in the box next to the words Show Time if Radio is Off Touch the screen where the words Show Time if Radio is Off are displayed to change the current setting Changing the Time Zone 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed The clock setting menu will appear on the screen 3 To
388. the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission Positive Battery Post into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories ee WHAT TO DO N EMERGENCIES 445 3 If using a another vehicle to jump start the battery CAUTION park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the could establish a ground connection and personal positive post of the discharged vehicle injury could result 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper Jump Starting Procedure cable to the positive post of the booster battery WARNING Failure to follow this procedure could result in per 3 Connect the negative end of the jumper cable to the negative post of the booster battery 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to a good engine ground exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle s engine away from the battery and the fuel injection system sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex plosion 446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M WARNINCG Do not connect the cable to the negative
389. the switches located on either side of the lens Press a switch a second time to turn the light off Also the rear cargo lamp may be turned on by pressing the lens Press the lens a second time to turn the light off Cargo Lamp When a door is open and the interior lights are on rotating the dimmer control all the way down to the off detent will cause all the interior lights to turn off This is also known as the Party mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle s battery 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS The windshield wiper washer control lever is located on the right side of the steering column The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch located at the end of the lever For information on using the rear window wiper washer refer to Rear Window Features in Under standing the Features of Your Vehicle 036407502 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the LO position for low speed wiper operation Rotate the end of the lever upward to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 031507503 Front Wiper Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left
390. the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 lbs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE e The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity o
391. this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tem s memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 reprogrammed All vehicle keys must be taken to an authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors swing gate and ignition for unauthorized operation The Vehicle Security Alarm provides both audible and visible signals when activated The horn will sound the head lights park lamps and or turn signals will flash repeat edly for three minutes If the disturbance is still present driver s door passenger door other doors ignition after three minutes the headlights park lamps and or turn signals will flash for an additional 15 minutes NOTE The Panic Alarm and the Vehicle Security Alarm are
392. tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle EEIIIIIGIIIISGIIIIIIGUGULSIGIGIUIULLLCLIC LILLCHU LTLUISLLULCLUL UIXIUNLGoUAL MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam Cooling System age e Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition WARNING when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in You or others can be badly burned by hot engine motion coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If e Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the you see or hear steam coming from under the hood vehicle do not open the hood until the radiator has had time e Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires t0 cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic 4P when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot testing Engine Coolant Checks Check the engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti systems can result in civil penalties being assessed freeze Check the front of the A C condenser if against you equipped or radiator for any accumulation of bugs
393. tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety han dling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you refer to your original equipment or contact an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 401 WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in fals
394. to call e For example you can say 234 567 8901 e The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call by Saying a Name e Press the amp button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile
395. to properly wear the vehicle seat belt should be secured in the rear seat in a child restraint or belt positioning booster seat Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 1 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should ALWAYS use their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Airbags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door If your vehicle has side airbags and deployment occurs the side airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M ve WARNING Continued modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If If the vehicle has side airbags they also need room You Need Assistance to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat WARNING Airbag System Components e Relying on the air
396. to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317 NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position Temperature Control Use this control right rotary knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures 318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System If Equipped The controls for the heating air conditioning and venti lation system in this vehicle consist of a series of rotary knobs These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions anas usua tae a a la lee a a ee ar arena at aru a RR ee a a a a RR aha Ta a a a AAA RA ew gae e 04560911 Climate Controls The instrument panel features four airflow registers Two registers are located on the outer ends of the instrument panel and two are located in the center of the instrument panel These registers can be closed to partially block airflow and they can be adjusted to direct airflow where the occupant desires Mode Control The mode control allows you to choose from several pat terns of air dist
397. tored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes Operation Instructions DISC MODE for CD and MP3 WMA Audio Play DVD VIDEO The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by geographic region These region codes must match in order for the disc to play If the region code for the DVD disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD player it will not play the disc Customers may take their vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code of the player a maximum of five times CAUTION The radio may shut down during extremely hot conditions When this occurs the radio will indicate Disc Hot and shut off until a safe temperature is reached This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player and other radio internal components 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio LOAD Button Loading Compact Disc s Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the corresponding number 1 6 where the CD is being load
398. ts and remains lit for six to 94 eight seconds when the ignition is first turned on If the light does not come on for six to eight seconds stays on or comes on while driving have the airbag system checked by an authorized dealer Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 14 Rear Axle Lock Indicator If Equipped REAR Tris light indicates when the rear axle lock has g been activated 15 Tachometer Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute RPM Do not operate the engine with the tachometer pointer in the red area Engine damage will occur 16 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion If the engine is critically hot a warning chime will sound 10 times After the chime turns off the engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out 17 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi e mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed BEEN UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 18 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera WARNING ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily others could be badly burned by steam or boilin
399. ttaching it to the Velcro in the upper rear channel making sure the retainer is fully seated and corner Start the zipper but close only about 1 in 2 5 cm properly positioned on the door frame Failure to do so can result in wind and water leaks or damage to the window Incorrect Insertion 2 Correct Insertion UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225 14 Insert the retainer along the bottom edge of the window into the bottom side channel beginning at the front and working to the rear of the vehicle Finish by closing the zipper completely and attaching the Velcro along the top and rear of the window Repeat this step for the opposite side 226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 15 Locate the black swing gate bar Slide the swing gate bar over the receiver at the bottom inside of the rear window The spongy part of the seal should be down and pointed outward to seal with the swing gate when closed eee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227 16 Install the rear window by starting both zipper ends 18 Grasp the swing gate bar and position it into the at the lower left corner of the rear window opening swing gate brackets Ensure that the zippers are properly started and aligned before zipping to prevent damage 19 Complete the installation of the sail panel by insert 4 ine the rest of the retainer into the body channel 17 Run the first zipper fully around to the
400. ture allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a colli sion the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and take the forces of a collision the best Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Continued Continued 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ie WARNING Continued e Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt lat
401. two bolts are installed AR coop omm 6 Reinstall the wiper arms 819292b7 atat 4 Tighten all side bar attachment bolts UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241 REAR WINDOW FEATURES HARD TOP ONLY KJ Rotate the switch upward to the On position will Rear Window Wiper Washer If Equipped activate the rear wiper A rotary ring switch on the control lever located on the Rotate the switch upward to the washer position right side of the steering column controls the operation will activate that rear washer The washer pump of the rear wiper washer function will continue to operate as long as the lever or ring is engaged Upon release the wipers will cycle three times before returning to the set position If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned to the LOCK position the wiper will automatically return to the Park position When the vehicle is restarted the wiper will resume function at whichever position the switch is set at 031507505 Rear Wiper Washer Control 242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ie Rear Window Defroster If Equipped CAUTION The rear window defroster button is located on the bottom right side of the blower control knob Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster the heating elements An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear e Use ca
402. uch the screen where the words Set Time Zone are displayed The time zone selection menu will appear on the screen 4 Select a time zone by touching the screen where your selection appears If you do not see a time zone that you want to select touch the screen where the word Page is displayed to view additional time zones in the menu 5 Touch the screen where the word Save is displayed Clock Setting Procedure RER REN Radio Uconnect gps RER Only The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite The ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time GMT This is the worldwide standard for time This makes the system s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and daylight savings information is set To Manually Set the Clock RER REN 1 Turn on the radio 2 Touch the screen where the time is displayed 3 Touch the screen where User Clock is displayed the clock setting menu will appear on the screen 4 To move the hour forward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing upward is dis played To move the hour backward touch the screen where the word Hour with the arrow pointing down ward is displayed 5 To move the minute forward touch the screen where the word Min with the arrow pointing upward is displayed To move the minute backward touch the screen where the word Min
403. uid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNINCG Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Di
404. und on a steep grade Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury 360 STARTING AND OPERATING M Driving Downhill Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent What is the surface traction Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow controlled descent Are there obstacles Is it a straight descent Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L Low and proceed with caution Allow engine braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if necessary but do not allow the tires to lock WARNINCG Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose control and be seriously injured Driving Across an Incline If at all possible avoid driving across an incline If it is necessary know your vehicle s abilities Driving across an incline places more weight on the downhill wheels which increases the possibilities of a downhill slide or rollover Make sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable soils If possible transverse the incline at an angle heading slightly up or down WARNING Driving across an incline increases the risk of a rollover which may result in severe injury I
405. ut your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination NOTE The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or ra rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident 418 STARTING AND OPERATING ee Trailer Tongue Weight TW The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control If Equipped The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue It typically provides adjustable friction associ ated with the telescoping motion to dampen any un wanted trailer swaying motion
406. utomatic car wash Window scratches and wax buildup may result Do not lower the top when the temperature is CAUTION The soft top is not designed to carry any additional loads such as roof racks spare tires building hunt ing or camping supplies and or luggage etc Also it was not designed as a structural member of the vehicle and thus cannot properly carry any addi tional loads other than environmental rain snow etc below 41 F 5 C Damage to the top may result Do not lower the top when the windows are dirty If the temperature is below 72 F 24 C and or the top Grit may scratch the window has been folded down for a period of time the top will appear to have shrunk when you raise it making it difficult to put up This is caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl coating on the fabric top Do not move your vehicle until the top has been either fully attached to the windshield frame or fully lowered Continued 202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued WARNING e Do not lower the top with the windows installed s Do not Gave the vehicle wih the tear window Window and top damage may occur Refer to Appearance Care for Fabric Top Models in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further infor mation It contains important information on cleaning and caring for your vehicle s fabric top Do not use any tools screwdrivers etc to pry or force any of t
407. vation Criteria The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to activate e Vehicle must be stopped e Vehicle must be on an 8 or greater incline 3 for manual transmission equipped vehicles 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Sx ee e Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction i e vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear vehicle back ing uphill is in REVERSE gear WARNING There may be situations on minor hills i e less than 8 with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer where the system will not activate and slight rolling may occur which could cause a collision with an other vehicle or object Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle The system will only work if the intended direction of the vehicle and vehicle gear match For example if the intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is in DRIVE automatic transmission equipped vehicle and the activation criteria are met HSA will activate HSA on Automatic Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears on vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission The system will not activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL HSA on Manual Transmission Vehicles The system will work in REVERSE forward gears and NEUTRAL on manual transmission equipped vehicles The system does not recognize NEUTRAL on manual vehicles thus it will hold the vehicle on an incline for a short period
408. vel can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear If the brake fluid level is abnormally low check system for leaks Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued e e e e e e Use only manufacturers recommended brake To avoid contamination from foreign matter or fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and or impair its performance The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also labeled on the origi nal factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a accident Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued eee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHIC
409. vent and add if required M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 502 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES M Once a Month CAUTION e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage Failure to perform the required maintenance items may result in damage to the vehicle e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required Required Maintenance Intervals Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake pages for the required maintenance intervals master cylinder power steering and transmission and add as needed e Check all lights and other electrical items for correct operation At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Inspect the brake hoses and lines e Check the manual transmission fluid level ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 503 6 000 Miles 10 000 km or 6 Months Maintenance Service 12 000 Miles 20 000 km or 12 Months Maintenance Service Schedule Schedule L1 Change the engine oil and engine oil filter L1 Rotate tires Odometer Reading Date Repair Order Dealer Code Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Change the engine oil and engine oil filter Rotate tires If using your vehicle for any of the following Dusty or off road conditions Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace if necessary Inspect the br
410. witch a 135 o Removing The Rear Seat Two Door E DIaspsdToS D 58 Sow acesceane be eub atl e ee es 135 iuri T ade oes 128 sfront Fos Light dE Pauipped os necne 135 Rep acing UE KEE eE T TW one 129 O Instrument Panel Dimmer 135 0 60 40 Split Folding Rear Seat Four Door c a eee 0 lu yere prepire sun bau 4 Yee od 129 Antenor O NS vues vebea v we p vu ore e 136 Mi To Open And Close The Hood 131 W Windshield Wipers And Washers 138 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 o Windshield Wiper Operation 138 W Electrical Power Outlet 0 146 E Intermittent Wiper System os4 6s s0e6 lt 9 132 ME OPd aot pena tay de eee 9 urea Eii 148 o Windshield Washers 0 139 Prom Cupholder 2 40544 6 on 8 x Reo as 148 O Mist TESORO pant pee rues ow eS oe ao ES 140 H Rear Cupholders a Tilt Steering Column saca pee RELIER PES I MSp verse ose kee lll Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 142 O Console Storage Compartment 149 IO ACUVALG e drsor ars GaGa ROS HR owed e des 143 O Rear Storage Compartment 150 to Set a Desired Speed 4o ek masks 143 W Dual Top If Equipped 150 NG WedCiy ele n 144 H Removing The Soft Top e cse dina 151 ELIO Resume Speed cansa nod gun voc Eas grs 144 O Installing The Soft Top iius euk e nns 153 o To Vary The Speed Setting os susce s xk s 144 W Freedom Top Three Piece M
411. y from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes on Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 The radio uses the fo
412. y prevailing road conditions The BAS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydro planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others ee STARTING AND OPERATING 373 Hill Start Assist HSA The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill HSA will maintain the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the brake pedal If the driver does not apply the throttle during this short period of time the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill The system will release brake pressure in proportion to amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in the intended direction of travel WARNING If the clutch pedal manual transmission only re mains pressed during the application of the throttle the HSA will disengage allowing the vehicle to roll down the incline This could cause a collision with another vehicle or object To avoid this do not apply throttle while pressing the clutch pedal until you are ready to release the clutch Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle HSA Acti
413. ystem that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Hill Start Assist HSA Electronic Roll Mitigation ERM Electronic Stability Program ESP and Trailer Sway Control TSC All of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari ous driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking Refer to Anti Lock Brake System in Starting and Operating for further information WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the ve hicle nor can they increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopar dize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is ap

2010 Jeep Wrangler Owner`s guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents